instruction manual - You have reached ftp.hobbico.com

TM
TM
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1M23N33602
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION............................................... 4
BASIC OPERATION........................................ 39
●Support and Service.......................................... 4
●How to Turn Transmitter Power ON/OFF.... 39
●Application, Export, and Modification............ 5
●User Name Registration.................................. 39
●Compliance Information................................... 5
●Home Screen.................................................... 40
●Safety Precautions (do not operate without
reading).............................................................. 7
●User Menu........................................................ 41
BEFORE USE.................................................... 11
●Features of T12K ............................................ 11
●Contents and Technical Specifications........... 12
●System Compatibility...................................... 12
●Accessories........................................................ 13
●Transmitter Controls....................................... 15
●Installation and Removal of the Battery....... 16
●Battery Charging............................................. 17
●Transmitter's Antenna.................................... 18
●Switch (SA-SH)................................................ 19
●Stick Control.................................................... 19
●Stick Adjustment............................................. 23
●Digital Trims T1-T4......................................... 25
●Push Dial Operation........................................ 26
●HOME/EXIT and U.MENU/MON. Button.. 27
●Link Procedure T-FHSS Air........................... 42
●Link Procedure S-FHSS . ............................... 44
●Range Testing Your R/C System..................... 45
RECEIVER AND SERVO INSTALLATION.. 46
●Servo Connection By Model Type.................. 46
●Model Basic Setting Procedure...................... 49
FUNCTIONS OF SYSTEM MENU................. 55
Trainer.............................................................. 56
Display.............................................................. 59
User Name........................................................ 60
Sound................................................................ 61
H/W Setting...................................................... 62
Start SEL......................................................... 64
Auto Lock ....................................................... 67
Information . ................................................... 68
SBUS Servo . ................................................... 69
●Volume.............................................................. 27
●Slide Lever........................................................ 27
FUNCTIONS OF LINKAGE MENU.............. 74
●Connector / Plug.............................................. 28
(Common Functions)
Linkage Menu Functions Table..................... 74
Servo Monitor.................................................. 75
Model Select..................................................... 76
Model Type...................................................... 78
System.............................................................. 80
Function........................................................... 81
Sub-Trim.......................................................... 83
Reverse............................................................. 84
Fail Safe............................................................ 85
End Point......................................................... 86
Servo Speed . ................................................... 87
●Micro SD Card................................................. 29
●Receiver Nomenclature................................... 31
●Receiver's Antenna Installation...................... 33
●S.BUS/S.BUS2 Installation............................. 35
●S.BUS Wiring example.................................... 36
●S.BUS2 System................................................. 37
●Telemetry System............................................. 38
2 <Introduction>
Throttle Cut (Air/Heli Only).......................... 88
Idle Down (Air Only)...................................... 89
Swash Ring (Heli Only).................................. 90
Swash (Heli Only, Except H-1)....................... 91
T1-T4 Setting................................................... 94
Stick Alarm...................................................... 95
Warning............................................................ 96
Telemetry Set................................................... 97
Telemetry....................................................... 100
Telemetry:Rx-batt......................................... 104
Telemetry:Ext-volt........................................ 105
Telemetry:Temp............................................. 106
Telemetry:RPM............................................. 107
Telemetry:Altitude........................................ 108
Telemetry:Vario............................................. 109
Telemetry:Battery......................................... 112
Telemetry:Distance....................................... 113
Telemetry:Speed............................................ 115
Telemetry:Servo Sensor................................ 116
Telemetry:Current Sensor............................ 119
Sensor............................................................. 122
Sensor: Reload............................................... 123
Sensor: Register............................................. 123
Sensor: Relocate............................................ 124
Sensor: Set Slot.............................................. 124
Data Reset...................................................... 125
FUNCTIONS OF MODEL MENU................ 126
●Common Functions....................................... 126
Servo Monitor (Linkage Menu)
Condition (Glid/Heli Only)........................... 127
Dual Rate....................................................... 129
Program Mix.................................................. 131
Fuel Mix (Air/Heli Only).............................. 133
●Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions........ 135
Model Menu Functions List......................... 135
Pitch Curve (Air Only)................................. 137
THR Curve (Air/Glid/Multirotor)............... 138
THR Delay (Air Only).................................. 139
AIL Differential (Air/Glid Except 1-AIL)... 140
Flap Setting (Air/Glid 2-FLP and Up)........ 142
AIL to Camber FLP (Air/Glid 2-AIL+2-FLP
and Up)........................................................ 143
AIL to Brake FLP (Glid Only, 4-FLP)........ 144
AIL to RUD (Air/Glid).................................. 145
RUD to AIL (Air/Glid).................................. 146
Camber Mix (Air/Glid Except 1-AIL)......... 148
ELE to Camber (Air/Glid Except 1-AIL)... 150
Camber FLP to ELE (Air/Glid 2-AIL+1-FLP
and Up)......................................................... 151
Butterfly (Glid Only, Normal Wing 2-AIL and
Up, Flying Wing 2-AIL+1FLP and Up).... 153
Trim Mix (Glid Only, 2-AIL and Up).......... 155
Airbrake (Air Only, 2-AIL and Up)............. 157
Gyro (Air/Glid/Multirotor).......................... 159
V-tail (Air/Glid) ............................................ 161
Ailevator (Air/Glid)....................................... 162
Winglet (Flying Wing Only)......................... 163
Motor (Air/Glid)............................................ 164
RUD to ELE (Air Only)................................ 166
Snap Roll (Air Only)..................................... 167
FLY Mode (Multirotor Only)....................... 169
●Helicopter Functions..................................... 170
Model Menu Functions List......................... 170
PIT Curve/Pit Trim....................................... 171
THR Curve/Throttle Hover Trim/Throttle
Limiter......................................................... 174
THR Hold....................................................... 177
Swash Mix...................................................... 178
Throttle Mix................................................... 179
PIT to RUD (Revolution Mix)...................... 180
Gyro (for GY Type Gyro)............................. 181
Governor........................................................ 184
APPENDIX....................................................... 187
Timer ST1/ST2.............................................. 187
Switch Setting Method.................................. 190
Technical updates and additional programming examples available at:
http://www.futaba-rc.com/faq Entire Contents © 2017
<Introduction>
3
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing a Futaba® T-FHSS Air-2.4GHz* T12K series digital proportional R/C
system. This system is extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order
for you to make the best use of your system and to fly safely, please read this manual carefully.
If you have any difficulties while using your system, please consult the manual, our online
Frequently Asked Questions (on the web pages referenced below), your hobby dealer, or the
Futaba Service Center.
Due to unforeseen changes in production procedures, the information contained in this manual is
subject to change without notice.
Support and Service: It is recommended to have your Futaba equipment serviced annually during
your hobby’s “off season” to ensure safe operation.
In North America
Please feel free to contact the Futaba Service Center for assistance in operation, use and
programming. Please be sure to regularly visit the T12K Frequently Asked Questions web site
at www.futaba-rc.com/faq/. This page includes extensive programming, use, set up and safety
information on the T12K radio system and is updated regularly. Any technical updates and US
manual corrections will be available on this web page. If you do not find the answers to your
questions there, please see the end of our F.A.Q. area for information on contacting us via email
for the most rapid and convenient response.
Don’t have Internet access? Free internet access is available at most libraries and many other
public resources. We find internet support to be a fabulous reference for many modelers as items
can be printed and saved for future reference, and can be accessed at any hour of the day, night,
weekend or holiday. If you do not wish to access the internet for information, however, don’t
worry. Our support teams are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central time to assist you.
For Service Only:
Futaba Service Center
3002 N. Apollo Drive, Suite 1
Champaign, IL 61822
Phone: 217-398-0007
www.futaba-rc.com/service.html
Email: futabaservice@hobbico.com
For Support :
(Programming and user questions)
Please start here for answers to most questions:
www.futaba-rc.com/faq/
Fax: 217-398-7721
Phone: 217-398-8970 option 2
Outside North America
Please contact your Futaba importer in your region of the world to assist you with any questions,
problems or service needs.
Please recognize that all information in this manual, and all support availability, is based upon
the systems sold in North America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact
your region’s support center for assistance.
4 <Introduction>
Application, Export, and Modification
1. This product may be used for unmanned aerial vehicle use. It is not intended for use in any application
other than unmanned aerial vehicle control. The product is subject to regulations of the Ministry of Radio/
Telecommunications and is restricted under Japanese law to such purposes.
2. Exportation precautions:
(a) When this product is exported from the country of manufacture, its use is to be approved by the laws
governing the country of destination which govern devices that emit radio frequencies. If this product is
then re-exported to other countries, it may be subject to restrictions on such export. Prior approval of the
appropriate government authorities may be required. If you have purchased this product from an exporter
outside your country, and not the authorized Futaba distributor in your country, please contact the seller
immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met.
(b) Use of this product with anything other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control
Regulations, and an application for export approval must be submitted. This equipment must not be utilized
to operate equipment other than radio controlled models.
3. Modification, adjustment, and replacement of parts: Futaba is not responsible for unauthorized
modification, adjustment, and replacement of parts on this product. Any such changes may void the
warranty.
Compliance Information Statement (for U.S.A.)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
(3)RF Radiation Exposure Statement (For T12K)
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
RF Radiation Exposure Statement (For R3008SB)
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your
body.
The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:
Futaba Service Center
3002 N Apollo Drive Suite 1, Champaign, IL 61822 U.S.A.
TEL (217)398-8970 or E-mail: support@hobbico.com (Support)
TEL (217)398-0007 or E-mail: futabaservice@hobbico.com (Service)
CAUTION:
To assure continued FCC compliance:
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the grantee of this device could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Declaration of Conformity (for EU)
Hereby, Futaba Corporation declares that the radio equipment type is in compliance with Directive
2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
http://www.rc.futaba.co.jp/english/dl/declarations.html
<Introduction>
5
IC
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This
transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
French:
Cet appareil radio est conforme au CNR d’Industrie Canada. L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée
seulement aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur du
dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible
de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition au rayonnement du CI établies pour un
environnement non contrôlé. Cet émetteur ne doit pas être co-situé ou fonctionner conjointement avec une
autre antenne ou émetteur.
Battery Recycling (for U.S.A.)
The RBRC™ SEAL on the (easily removable) nickel-cadmium battery and nickelmetal hydride battery contained in Futaba products indicates that Futaba Corporation is
voluntarily participating in an industry program to collect and recycle these batteries at the
end of their useful lives, when taken out of service within the United States. The RBRC™
program provides a convenient alternative to placing used nickel-cadmium batteries and
nickel-metal hydride batteries into the trash or municipal waste system, which is illegal in some areas. You
may contact your local recycling center for information on where to return the spent battery. Please call
1-800-8-BATTERY for information on NiCd/NiMH battery recycling in your area. Futaba Corporation's
involvement in this program is part of its commitment to protecting our environment and conserving
natural resources.
NOTE: Our instruction manuals encourage our customers to return spent batteries to a local recycling
center in order to keep a healthy environment.
RBRC™ is a trademark of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation.
Flying Safety
Where to Fly
We recommend that you fly at a recognized model airplane flying field. You can find model clubs
and fields by asking your nearest hobby dealer, or, in the US, by contacting the Academy of Model
Aeronautics.
The national Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA) has more than 2,500 chartered clubs across the
country. Through any one of them, instructor training programs and insured newcomer training are
available. Contact the AMA at the address or toll-free phone number below.
Academy of Model Aeronautics
5161 East Memorial Drive
Muncie, IN 47302
Tele. (800) 435-9262
Fax (765) 289-4248
or via the Internet at http:\\www.modelaircraft.org
Always pay particular attention to the flying field’s rules, as well as the presence and
location of spectators, the wind direction, and any obstacles on the field. Be very
careful flying in areas near power lines, tall buildings, or communication facilities as
there may be radio interference in their vicinity.
6 <Introduction>
Precautions
Application, Export, and Modification Precautions.
1. This product is designed only for use with radio control models. Use of the product described in this instruction
manual is limited to radio control models.
2. Export precautions:
a) When this product is exported, it cannot be used where prohibited by the laws governing radio waves of the
destination country.
b) Use of this product with other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations.
3. Modification, adjustment, and parts replacement
Futaba is not responsible for unauthorized modification, adjustment, or replacement of parts on this product.
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior permission.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
Futaba is not responsible for the use of this product by the customer.
Company and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective company.
For safe use
Please observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this product at all times.
Meaning of Special Markings:
The parts of this manual indicated by the following marks require special attention from the standpoint of safety.
DANGER - Procedures which may lead to dangerous conditions and cause death/serious injury if not carried
out properly.
WARNING - Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition or cause death or serious injury to the
user if not carried out properly, or procedures where the probability of superficial injury or physical damage is
high.
CAUTION - Procedures where the possibility of serious injury to the user is small, but there is a danger of
injury, or physical damage, if not carried out properly.
= Prohibited
= Mandatory
WARNING: Always keep electrical components away from small children.
Flying Precautions
WARNING
Never grasp the transmitter antenna while flying.
■ The transmitter output may drop drastically.
Always make sure that all transmitter stick
movements operate all servos properly in the model
prior to flight. Also, make sure that all switches,
etc. function properly as well. If there are any
difficulties, do not use the system until all inputs are
functioning properly.
Never fly in the range check mode.
■ In the dedicated range test range check mode, the
transmitter output range is reduced and may cause a
crash.
While operating, never touch the transmitter with,
or bring the transmitter near, another transmitter, a
cellphone, or other wireless devices.
■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.
Never fly on a rainy day, when the wind is strong,
and at night.
■ Water could lead to failure or improper functionality
and poor control of the aircraft which could lead to a
crash.
Never turn the power switch on and off during
flight or while the engine or motor is running.
■ Operation will become impossible and the aircraft will
crash. Even if the power switch is turned on, operation
will not begin until transmitter and receiver internal
processing is complete.
Do not fly when you are physically impaired as it
could pose a safety hazard to yourself or others.
Do not touch the engine, motor, or FET amp
during and immediately after use.
■ These items may become hot during use.
Do not point the antenna directly toward the
aircraft during flight.
■ The antenna is directional and the transmitter output
is weakest. (The strength of the radio waves is greatest
from the sides of the antenna.)
<Introduction>
7
Do not fly at the following places:
■ Near another radio control flying field.
■ Near or above people.
■ Near homes, schools, hospitals or other places where
people congregate.
■ Near high voltage lines, high structures, or
communication facilities.
For safety, fly so that the aircraft is visible at all
times.
■ Flying behind buildings or other large structures
will not only cause you to lose sight of the aircraft, but
also degrade the RF link performance and cause loss of
control.
From the standpoint of safety, always set the fail
safe function.
■ In particular, normally set the throttle channel to idle.
For a helicopter, set the throttle channel to maintain a
hover.
When flying, always return the transmitter setup
screen to the Home screen.
■ Erroneous input during flight is extremely dangerous.
Always check the remaining capacity of the
transmitter and receiver batteries before each flying
session prior to flight.
■ Low battery capacity will cause loss of control and a
crash.
Always check operation of each control surface
and perform a range test before each flying session.
Also, when using the trainer function, check
the operation of both the teacher and student
transmitter.
■ Even one transmitter setting or aircraft abnormality
can cause a crash.
Before turning on the transmitter:
1. Always move the transmitter throttle stick position
to the minimum (idle) position.
2. Turn on the transmitter first and then the receiver.
To turn off the transmitter's power switch, wait
until after the engine or motor has stopped (the state
in which it will not rotate again), and then:
1. Turn off the receiver power switch.
2. Then turn off the transmitter power switch.
■ If the power switch is turned on/off in the opposite
order, the propeller may rotate unexpectedly and cause
a serious injury.
■ Also always observe the above order when setting
the fail safe function.
■ Maximum low throttle: Direction in which the engine
or motor runs at the slowest speed or stops.
When adjusting the transmitter, stop the engine
except when necessary. In the case of a motor,
disconnect the wiring and to allow it to continue
operation. When doing so, please exercise extreme
caution. Ensure that the aircraft is secured and that
it will not come into contact with anything or anyone.
Ensure that the motor will not rotate prior to making
any adjustments.
■ Unexpected high speed rotation of the engine may
cause a serious injury.
Battery and Charger Handling Precautions
DANGER
Do not recharge a battery that is damaged,
deteriorated, leaking electrolyte, or wet.
Do not charge the battery if it is covered with any
object as it may become very hot.
Do not use the charger in applications other than
as intended.
Do not use the battery in a combustible
environment.
Do not allow the charger or battery to become
wet.
■ Do not use the charger when it or your hands are
wet. Do not use the charger in humid places. Do not short circuit the battery.
Do not solder or repair, deform, modify, or
disassemble the battery and/or battery charger.
Do not drop the battery into a fire or bring it near
a fire.
Do not charge and store the battery in direct
sunlight or other hot places.
8 <Introduction>
■ The gas could ignite and cause an explosion or fire.
Always charge the battery before each flying
session.
■ If the battery goes dead during flight, the aircraft will
crash.
Charge the nickel-metal hydride battery with the
dedicated charger supplied with the set.
■ Charging the battery past the specified value may
cause a fire, combustion, rupture, or liquid leakage.
When quick charging, do not charge the battery above
1C.
■ Do not charge the battery while riding in a vehicle.
Vibration will prevent normal charging.
Insert the power cord plug firmly into the
receptacle up to its base.
Always use the charger with the specified power
supply voltage.
■ Use the special charger by connecting it to a proper
power outlet.
If the battery liquid should get in your eyes, do
not rub your eyes, but immediately wash them with
tap water or other clean water and get treated by a
doctor.
■ The liquid can cause blindness. WARNING
Do not touch the charger and battery for any
length of time during charging.
■ Doing so may result in burns. Do not use a charger or battery that has been
damaged.
Do not touch any of the internal components of
the charger.
■ Doing so may cause electric shock or a burn.
If any abnormalities such as smoke or
discoloration are noted with either the charger or the
battery, remove the battery from the transmitter or
charger and disconnect the power cord plug and do
not use the charger.
■ Continued use may cause fire, combustion,
generation of heat, or rupture.
Do not subject the batteries to impact.
■ Doing so may cause fire, combustion, generation of
heat, rupture, or liquid leakage.
Do not repeatedly charge a nickel-metal hydride
battery in the shallow discharge state.
Use and store the battery and battery charger in
a secure location away from children.
■ Doing so may cause electric shock or injury.
If the battery leaks liquid or generates an
abnormal odor, immediately move it to a safe place
for disposal.
■ Not doing so may cause combustion.
If the battery liquid gets on your skin or clothing,
immediately flush the area with tap water or other
clean water.
■ Consult a doctor. The liquid can cause skin damage.
After the specified charging time has elapsed,
end charging and disconnect the charger from the
receptacle.
When recycling or disposing of the battery, isolate
the terminals by covering them with cellophane tape.
■ Short circuit of the terminals may cause combustion,
generation of heat or rupture.
■ The battery memory effect will substantially shorten
the battery life even if it is recharged.
CAUTION
Do not use the nickel-metal hydride battery with
devices other than the corresponding transmitter.
Do not place heavy objects on top of the battery
or charger. Also, do not place the battery or charger
in any location where it could fall.
■ Doing so may cause damage or injury.
Do not store or use the battery and charger where
it is dusty or humid.
■ Insert the power cord plug into the receptacle only
after eliminating the dust.
Do not charge the battery in extreme
temperatures.
■ Doing so will degrade the battery performance. An
ambient temperature of 10 ℃ to 30 ℃ (50F to 86F) is
ideal for charging.
Unplug the charger when not in use.
Do not bend or pull the cord unreasonably and do
not place heavy objects on the cord.
■ The power cord may be damaged and cause
combustion, generation of heat, or electric shock.
After the transmitter has been used for a long
time, the battery may become hot. Immediately
remove from the transmitter.
■ Not doing so may cause a burn.
<Introduction>
9
Micro SD Card (Commercial Product) Handling Precautions
*Read the instruction manual supplied
with the micro SD card for details.
WARNING
Never disassemble or modify the micro SD card.
Do not unreasonably bend, drop, scratch or place
heavy objects on the micro SD card.
Do not use the micro SD card where it may be
exposed to water, chemicals, oil, or other fluids.
■ Doing so may cause a fire or electric shock by short
circuiting.
If smoke or an abnormal odor emanates from the
card, immediately turn off the transmitter power.
CAUTION
Since the micro SD card is an electronic device,
be careful of static electricity.
■ Static electricity may cause erroneous operation.
Do not use the micro SD card near radio and
television sets, audio equipment, motors and other
equipment that generates noise.
■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.
Do not store the micro SD card in the following places:
・Where the humidity is high
・Where the temperature difference is severe
・Where it is very dusty
・Where the card will be exposed to shock and vibration
・Near speakers and other magnetic devices
Do not insert foreign matter into the transmitter
card slot.
■ Doing so will cause trouble.
Do not expose the card to shock and vibration
and do not remove the card from the card slot while
data is being written or read.
■ The data may be damaged or lost.
●Recorded data
The data recorded on the micro SD card cannot be
compensated regardless of the contents or cause of the
trouble or obstruction.
Futaba does not perform data restoration or recovery work.
Storage and Disposal Precautions
WARNING
Keep wireless equipment, batteries, aircraft, etc.
away from children.
CAUTION
Do not store wireless devices in the following places:
・Where it is extremely hot (40℃ [104F] or higher) or cold (-10℃
[14F] or lower)
・Where the equipment will be exposed to direct sunlight
・Where the humidity is high
・Where vibration is prevalent
・Where it is very dusty
・Where the device may be exposed to steam and heat
When the device will not be used for a long time,
remove the battery from the transmitter and aircraft
and store them in a dry place where the temperature
is between 0C and 30C [32F and 86F].
■ Left standing 'as is' may cause battery deterioration,
liquid leakage, etc.
Other Precautions
CAUTION
Do not directly expose plastic parts to fuel, oil,
exhaust gas, etc.
■ If left in such an environment, the plastic may be
attacked and damaged.
■ Since the metal parts of the case may corrode, always
keep them clean.
Join the Academy of Model Aeronautics.
■ The Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA) provides
guidelines and liability protection should the need arise.
Always use genuine Futaba products such as
transmitter, receiver, servo, ESC, battery, etc.
10 <Introduction>
■ Futaba is not responsible for damage sustained by
combination with other than Futaba Genuine Parts.
Use the parts specified in the instruction manual and
catalog.
This product SHOULD NOT be used for devices
that are directly related to human life, and those that
could be harmful to the human body, such as the
applications below.
(1) Medical Devices
(2) Aerospace/Aviation Related Devices
(3) Nuclear Devices, etc.
BEFORE USE
Features
T-FHSS Air system
The T12K transmitter has adopted the bidirectional communication system "T-FHSS Air". Data from the
receiver can be checked on your transmitter. T-FHSS Air is a maximum 14 channels (linear 12 channels +
switch 2 channels) 2.4GHz dedicated system.
S.BUS2 system
By using the S.BUS2 system, multiple servos, gyros and telemetry sensors are easily installed with a
minimum amount of cables.
Model types
Six swash types are available for helicopters. Six types of main wings and three types of tail wings are
available for airplanes, multicopters and gliders. Functions and mixing functions necessary for each model
type are set in advance at the factory.
Data input
Large graphic LCD and new type Push dial substantially improve ease of setup.
Stick
Improved feel, adjustable length and tension.
NiMH battery
T12K is operated by a 6.0 V/1,800 mAh Nickel-Metal Hydride battery.
Micro SD card (Secure Digital memory card) (Not included)
Model data can be saved to a micro SD card (SD:32MB-2GB SDHC:4GB-32GB). When T12K
transmitter software files are released, the software can be updated by using a micro SD card update.
Edit button
Two edit buttons are provided, and the operating screen can be immediately “Returned” to the HOME
screen during operation. Setting operation can be performed easily by combining this button with a Push
dial.
Vibration function
Selects a function that alerts the operator to various alarms and timers by vibrating the transmitter in
addition to sounding a buzzer.
<Before Use>
11
Contents and Technical Specifications
Your T12K includes the following components:
(Specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice.)
• T12K Transmitter
• R3008SB Receiver
• HT5F1800B NiMH Battery & Charger
*The set contents depend on the type of set.
Transmitter T12K
(2-stick, 14-channel, T-FHSS Air-2.4G system)
Frequency band: 2.4GHz band
RF power output: 100mW EIRP
System: T-FHSS Air, S-FHSS, switchable
Power supply: 6.0V HT5F1800B NiMH battery
Receiver R3008SB
(T-FHSS Air-2.4G system, dual antenna diversity, S.BUS system)
Frequency band: 2.4GHz band
RF power output: 25mW EIRP
Power requirement: 4.8V~7.4V battery or regulated output from ESC, etc. (*1)
Size: 0.98 x 1.86 x 0.56 in. (24.9 x 47.3 x 14.3 mm)
Weight: 0.36 oz. (10.1g)
(*1) When using ESCs, make sure that the regulated output capacity meets your usage application.
Note: The battery in the T12K transmitter is not connected to the battery
connector at initial. Please connect the battery connector before use.
System Compatibility
The 12K is a 2.4GHz T-FHSS Air system. The transmitter can also be switched to S-FHSS. (However, the telemetry
system cannot be used with S-FHSS.) The usable receivers are shown below.
Communications System
Usable Receivers (2017,11)
T-FHSS Air
R3006SB, R3008SB,
R3001SB
S-FHSS R2001SB, R2008SB,
R2006GS, R2106GF
NOTE:
*The Futaba T-FHSS Air system cannot be used with Futaba S-FHSS/FASST/FASSTest systems.
Use it with a T-FHSS Air system transmitter and receiver. The T12K is a T-FHSS Air system,
but can also be used with an S-FHSS receiver by switching to S-FHSS. However, in this case the
telemetry system cannot be used.
*The T-FHSS Air system and T-FHSS surface system are different. The T12K cannot be used with
the R304SB, R304SB-E or T-FHSS surface system receivers.
12 <Before Use>
Accessories
The following additional accessories are available from your dealer. Refer to a Futaba catalog
for more information:
• HT5F1800B Transmitter battery pack - the (1800mAh) transmitter NiMH battery pack may be
easily exchanged with a fresh one to provide enough capacity for extended flying sessions.
• FT2F2100B/FT2F1700B Transmitter LiFe battery pack can also be used by using an exclusive
spacer. However, charge only with a charger designed for LiFe batteries.
• Trainer cord - the optional training cord may be used to help a beginning pilot learn to fly easily
by placing the instructor on a separate transmitter. Note that the T12K transmitter may be
connected to another T12K system, as well as to any other models of Futaba transmitters. The
T12K transmitter uses one of the three cord plug types according to the transmitter connected.
(Refer to the description at the TRAINER function instructions). The part number of this cord is:
FUTM4405.
• Servos - There are various kinds of servos. Choose the Futaba servos that are suited for your
model and purpose.
• Telemetry sensor - With an optional sensor, you can set up a bidirectional communication system
to receive information about a model in flight.
[Temperature sensor : SBS-01T/TE] [Altitude sensor : SBS-01A/02A] [RPM sensor magnet type
: SBS-01RM] [RPM sensor optical type : SBS-01RO] [GPS sensor : SBS-01G/02G] [Voltage
sensor : SBS-01V] [S.BUS servo sensor : SBS-01S] [Current sensor : SBS-01C]
• Neck strap - Connect a neck strap to your T12K to make it easier to handle and keep your hands
free to improve your flying precision.
• Y-harnesses, servo extensions, hub, etc - Genuine Futaba extensions and Y-harnesses, including
a heavy-duty version with heavier wire, are available to aid in your larger model and other
installations.
• Gyros - a variety of genuine Futaba gyros is available for your aircraft or helicopter needs.
• Governor - for helicopter use. Automatically adjusts throttle servo position to maintain a constant
head speed regardless of blade pitch, load, weather, etc.
• Receivers - various models of Futaba receivers may be purchased for use in other models.
(Receivers for T-FHSS Air and S-FHSS types are available.)
<Before Use>
13
Throttle stick position warning
Power ON
Release of the throttle position warning
LINKAGE MENU 2/2 ⇒ WARNING ⇒ THR POS. ⇒ OFF
(Warning)
[
!]
Alarm !
WARNING
?
When using this transmitter with an RC
airplane or helicopter, turn on a throttle
position warning.
Move the throttle stick to the
bottom to turn off the throttle
alarm.
14 <Before Use>
Transmitter Controls T12K
●Antenna
●Volume(LD)
●Volume(RD)
●Monitor LED
●Switch(SC,SD,SG,SH)
●Switch(SA,SB,SE,SF)
●Slide Lever(LS)
●Slide Lever(RS)
●Stick
●Stick
(J2)
(J3)
(J4)
(J1)
●HOME/EXIT
Button
●U.MENU/MON.
(User Menu/
Servo Monitor)
Button
●Digital Trim
(T1,T2)
●Digital Trim
(T3,T4)
●Push Dial
(SYS,LNK,
MDL,RTN,S1)
●Neck Strap Attachment
●Power Switch
●LCD
*It slides upwards and turns on.
<Before Use>
15
Installation and Removal of the Transmitter Battery
NiMH Battery HT5F1800B
Turn off the transmitter
power switch.
Push
Slide the battery cover
off the transmitter in the
direction of the arrow in the
figure.
Insert the connector of the
battery and load the battery
into the transmitter.
Finish by installing the
battery cover.
Connect the battery
connector.
Danger
When closing the battery cover, be
careful that the battery cover does
not pinch the battery lead wires.
Battery lead wire shorts could lead to
abnormal heating, fire, and/or could cause
burns or large scale fires.
Warning
Be careful not to drop the battery.
Never disconnect the battery before the
T12K has completely shut down and the
transmitter screen is blank.
* Internal devices such as memories may be damaged.
* If any problems occur, the message “Backup Error”
will appear when you turn on the transmitter. If this
happens, do not use the transmitter. Send it to the
Futaba Service Center.
16 <Before Use>
Battery Charging
Before charging batteries, read the "Battery and Charger Handling Precautions".
How to charge the NiMH battery HT5F1800B
for the transmitter
Danger
The NiMH battery HT5F1800B is only for
your T12K. Do not use this battery for other
equipment.
Be sure to use the attached special charger
to charge the battery.
Charge
Plug
[Method of charging battery]
●Special charger
*Connect to AC outlet
specified.
Connector for battery charger
This is the connector for charging the NiMH
battery HT5F1800B that is installed in the
transmitter. Do not use any other chargers except
the attached special charger corresponding to
NiMH battery.
Warning
Do not connect any other chargers except
the special charger to this charging
connector.
Receiver Batt.
Charging display
Transmitter Batt.
Charging display
To T12K charge
connector
1. Connect the special charger to the wall
socket (AC outlet).
2. Connect the connectors to the T12K
charging jack.
*Confirm that the charging indicator, LED lamp, is on.
*Turn off the transmitter while charging the battery.
3. Remove the battery after 15 hours.
*Battery charging will not automatically stop. Remove the
battery and transmitter from the charger and remove the
charger from the wall socket.
*It is recommended to reactivate the battery by cycling
several times if the battery has not been used for a long
period.
*In the case of NiMH/NiCd batteries, you may find poor
performance of the battery if you have used the battery
only for a short period or if you repeat charging while the
battery is not fully discharged. It is suggested to discharge
the battery to the recommended level after use. It is also
recommended to charge the battery just before use.
<Before Use>
17
Transmitter Antenna
As with all radio frequency transmissions,
the strongest area of signal transmission is from
the sides of the transmitter antenna. As such,
the antenna should not be pointed directly at the
model. If your flying style creates this situation,
easily move the antenna to correct this situation.
Rotating antenna
The antenna can be rotated 180 degrees and
angled 90 degrees. Forcing the antenna further
than this can damage it. The antenna is not
removable.
Caution
Please do not grasp the transmitter
antenna during flight.
Doing so may degrade the quality of the RF
transmission to the model
Do not carry the transmitter by the
antenna.
This could damage the antenna and render the
transmitter inoperable.
Do not pull the antenna forcefully.
This could damage the antenna and render the
transmitter inoperable.
180°
90°
Low power
Monitor LED display
Transmitter status is displayed by LEDs.
High power
High power
LED
If you want to point your
transmitter at a model, bend
the antenna 90 degrees for
best signal strength.
Do not point the tip of the
antenna at a flying model,
this reduces signal quality.
18 <Before Use>
• Off
Radio waves are in the OFF state.
• On
Radio waves are being transmitted.
• Blinking
Power switch is turned on when any
condition switch is activated (in the ON
state).
Switch (SA-SH)
SF
SH
SE
SG
SA
SB
(Switch Type)
• SA : 3 positions; Alternate; Short lever
• SB : 3 positions; Alternate; Long lever
• SC : 3 positions; Alternate; Long lever
• SD : 3 positions; Alternate; Short lever
• SE : 3 positions; Alternate; Short lever
• SF : 2 positions; Alternate; Long lever
• SG : 3 positions; Alternate; Short lever
• SH : 2 positions; Momentary; Long lever
SC
SD
*You can choose switches and set the ON/OFF-direction in
the setting screen of the mixing functions.
Stick Control
Pitch axis
Elevator Stick
Aileron stick
Roll axis
Engine/motor
Power
Throttle stick
Yaw axis
Rudder stick
*Example Stick Mode2
<Before Use>
19
Stick control : Airplane Example
A general model example. (There is also a different operational model.)
Pitch Axis Control
Roll Axis Control
Right roll
Nose Up
The right aileron
is up.
The left aileron
is down.
*Example Stick Mode2
Elevator stick
Aileron stick
UP
To the right
Level flight
Elevator is
up.
Level flight
Neutral
Elevator is
down.
Left roll
The right
aileron is
down.
The left aileron
is up.
Aileron stick
DOWN
To the left
(moved to the top)
Throttle Control
High throttle
Nose Right
Throttle stick
Rudder stick
Rudder is
right.
High
To the right
(moved to the top)
Middle
Throttle stick
Neutral
Nose Left
20 <Before Use>
Neutral
Elevator stick
Nose Down
Yaw Axis Control
Straight
(moved to the bottom)
MIDDLE
(neutral)
Rudder is
left.
Low throttle
Rudder stick
To the left
Throttle stick
SLOW
(moved to the bottom)
Stick control : Helicopter Example
A general model example. (There is also a different operational model.)
*Example Stick Mode2
Pitch Axis Control
Roll Axis Control
Right roll
Nose Up
Elevator stick
Aileron stick
UP
To the right
(moved to the bottom)
Level flight
Level flight
Neutral
Neutral
Aileron stick
Elevator stick
Left roll
Nose Down
To the left
Nose Right
Yaw Axis Control
DOWN
(moved to the top)
Throttle /Pitch Control
Rudder stick
Throttle stick
Rise
To the right
Pitch Up
High
Hover
Throttle stick
Neutral
Straight
Descend
Middle
To the left
MIDDLE
(neutral)
Pitch Down
Rudder stick
Nose Left
High
(moved to the top)
Throttle stick
Slow
SLOW
(moved to the bottom)
<Before Use>
21
Stick control : Multicopter Example
A general model example. (There is also a different operational model.)
*Example Stick Mode2
Pitch Axis Control
Roll Axis Control
Right roll
Nose Up
Right slide
Elevator stick
Aileron stick
Hovering
Level flight
UP
Back slide
To the right
(moved to the bottom)
Hovering
Level flight
Neutral
Neutral
Left roll
Nose Down
Left slide
Aileron stick
Front slide
To the left
Elevator stick
DOWN
(moved to the top)
Throttle Control
Yaw Axis Control
Nose Right
Rudder stick
Rise
To the right
Hovering
Level flight
Throttle stick
HIGH
(moved to the top)
Hover
Throttle stick
Neutral
MIDDLE
(neutral)
Descend
Rudder stick
Nose Left
22 <Before Use>
To the left
Stop
Throttle stick
SLOW
(moved to the bottom)
Stick Adjustment
Adjusting stick length
You can adjust the length of the sticks to fit
your hand size. This is simple and recommended!
Lever Head
A
Lever Head
B
1. Hold lever head "B" and turn lever head "A"
counter-clockwise to release the lock.
2. Adjust stick length, then hold lever head "B"
and turn lever head "A" clockwise to lock.
Adjusting stick tension
You may adjust the tension of your sticks to provide the feel that you prefer for flying. To adjust the stick
tension springs, you'll first have to remove the rear of the transmitter case.
Remove these four screws
to remove the rear
transmitter case.
Remove the battery cover on the rear
of the transmitter, then unplug and
remove the battery.
<Before Use>
23
Elevator
Rudder
Aileron
Stick
Stick
The interior of your transmitter should look like the figure above. Use a small Phillips screwdriver
to rotate the adjusting screw of each stick for the desired spring tension. Increase tension by twisting
clockwise, decrease tension by twisting counter clockwise. When you have found the desired stick
tension, reattach the rear cover, install the four screws, then reinstall the battery and cover.
Mode 2 transmitter with rear case removed.
+ screw is clockwise.
Stick tension maximum
+ screw is counter-clockwise.
Stick tension minimum
Do not over-loosen
the screw or the
screw will touch
the case.
*The screw will touch the case.
24 <Before Use>
You can also adjust
how quickly a stick
returns to neutral.
Digital Trims T1-T4
This transmitter is equipped with 4 digital trims.
Each time you press a trim button, the trim position
moves one step. If you continue pressing it, the trim
position starts to move faster. In addition, when
the trim position returns to the center, the tone will
change. You can always monitor trim positions by
referencing the LCD screen.
T4
T3
T2
T1
*You can select the trim step amount and the display unit
on the home screen on the T1-T4 setting screen within the
linkage menu.
Note: The trim positions you have set will be stored in the
non-volatile memory and will remain there.
Digital trim operational example
*Example Stick Mode2
◆When the airplane goes up while the
elevator stick is neutral.
◆When the airplane dives while the
elevator stick is neutral.
◆Push the trim up to adjust
the elevator down.
◆Push the trim down to
adjust the elevator up.
Elevator neutral
Elevator neutral
Down
Up
◆Adjust so that the airplane flies level.
<Before Use>
25
Push Dial Operation
Data input operation is performed using the Push dial.
Left part
Push
Dial Scroll
Right part Long Push
[SYS]
Upper part Long Push
[LNK]
Left part Long Push
[MDL]
Lower part Long Push
[S1]
Lower part Push
[S1]
Center part Long Push
[RTN]
Center part Push
[RTN]
Push:Less than 1 second
Long Push:1 second or more
The cursor moves accordingly.
Increases or decreases values accordingly.
Jump to System Menu screen directly.
Jump to Linkage Menu screen directly.
Jump to Model Menu screen directly.
To Home screen
The cursor moves to the top of next page.
The cursor moves to the top of page.
Reset to the initialized value.
Change to the input data mode.
Changes to the moving cursor mode.
The data is entered.
Movement of cursor, value input or mode
selection:
Movement of the cursor on the menu screen
and movement of the cursor among items on a
setup screen can be controlled by scrolling your
finger to the left and right in the direction of the
arrow in the scrolling diagram above. You can
also go to the next page, if there is a next page.
This scrolling technique is also used for data
input, value input, mode selection, and similar
operations. Examples include: Value, ON, OFF,
INH, ACT, etc.
26 <Before Use>
Center part
Push
Lower part
Push
Push Dial
Push Dial:
Upper part
Push
Right part
Push
Push the
outer dial
part
RTN button:
Push the RTN button when you want to open
a setup screen or to switch between cursor move
mode (reverse display) and data input mode (box
display).
This button can also be used as the enter button
when a confirmation message is displayed on the
screen, etc.
S1 button:
Exiting setup screen:
When there is a next page on a menu screen or
setup screen, you can go to that page by touching
the S1 button. In this case, the cursor moves to
the screen title item of the page.
To end the operation on a setup screen and
return to the menu screen, move the cursor to the
screen title item and push the RTN button.
To return to home screen directly, touch the
HOME/EXIT button for 1 second.
Alternatively, move the cursor to the screen
title item and touch the RTN button to return to
the home screen from a menu screen.
HOME/EXIT and U.MENU/MON. Button
HOME/EXIT:
RETURN
Return to the previous
screen
Return to the Home
screen
Press
Press and hold
If pushed in HOME
screen.
HOME/EXIT
Button
U.MENU/MON.
Button
Volume
LD
To TELEMETRY display
Push and hold for
one (1) second from
HOME screen.
U.MENU/MON.:
Key lock On or Off
Press
To SERVO MONITOR display
Press and hold
To User Menu display
Slide Lever
RD
Volume LD and RD:
The volume LD and RD knobs allow for
analog input.
*The T12K transmitter beeps when the volume knob
reaches the center position.
*You can use each setting screen of the mixing functions to
select volumes and define the direction of a movement.
LS
RS
LS (Left), RS (right):
The slide lever LS and RS offer analog input.
*The T12K transmitter beeps when the lever comes to the
center.
*You can select a slide lever and set the movement
direction on the setting screen of mixing functions.
<Before Use>
27
Connector / Plug
Headphone plug
Plug in commercial 3.5mm headphones to listen
to telemetry data. (See telemetry section for
detailed settings.)
Headphone
plug
Trainer function
connector
S.BUS
connector (S.I/F)
Trainer function connector
When you use the trainer function, connect the
optional trainer cable between the transmitters
for teacher and student.
*You can set the trainer function on the Trainer Function
screen.
S.BUS connector (S.I/F)
When setting an S.BUS servo and telemetry
sensor, connect them both here.
(Supply power by 3-way hub or 2-way cord.)
Headphone cable
Audible telemetry data
Trainer cable
Trainer system
3-way hub or
2-way cord
28 <Before Use>
S.BUS servo setting
micro SD Card (Secure Digital memory card) (Not included)
The T12K transmitter model data can be
stored by using any commonly found micro SD
card. When T12K transmitter update software is
released, the software is updated using a micro
SD card.
(Commercial product)
SD standard and SDHC standard microSD cards
SD/SDHC format. Maximum size 2GB. SDXC
format is not supported.
(Some models may not be operated by card.)
*The data in the memory card cannot be
guaranteed regardless of the contents and cause
of trouble or damage. Always back-up the
valuable data in the memory card.
Restrictions when using a micro SD card
The following restrictions apply when using a
micro SD card:
*The micro SD card must first be initialized using the
T12K dedicated format. The micro SD card cannot be
used as is without formatting to the T12K.
*Initializing destroys all the data previously saved on the
card.
*A micro SD card formatted to the T12K cannot be written
directly from a PC by Windows Explorer, etc. The files
must be converted and written by the Futaba File System
software. Files are identified by number instead of name.
This special conversion software can be downloaded from
Futaba's web site at:
http://www.futaba-rc.com/software-updates.html
Inserting/removing the micro SD card
1.Turn off the transmitter power and then
open the battery cover at the back side of
the transmitter.
Caution
Do not install or remove the micro
SD card with the card slot pointing at
your face.
If you remove your fingers quickly, the micro SD
card could pop out and strike your face, which
could be dangerous.
Do not install and remove the micro
SD card with the micro SD card slot
facing your face.
If you remove your fingers quickly, the microSD
card may fly out and strike your face and is
dangerous.
S i n c e t h e m i c ro S D c a r d i s a
precision device, do not subject it to
unreasonable force or shock.
As the micro SD card is a precision
device, do not use excessive force
when installing it.
2. The micro SD card slot is shown in the figure
below.
microSD card slot
<Before Use>
29
[Inserting the card]
Turn the micro SD card so that its front
faces the rear of the transmitter and slide
the card into the slot.
*Push the card in just until it is firmly seated in the slot.
[Removing the card]
To remove the card, press once to release
the spring, then slide out the card.
3. Close the battery cover.
[IMPORTANT] Do not turn off the power until
the [FORMAT COMPLETED] message is
displayed.
5.End formatting by touching the RTN button.
micro SD card initialization
To use a micro SD card with the T12K, the
card must first be formatted. Once formatted, the
card does not have to be reformatted. Formatting
is performed by the T12K.
[IMPORTANT] When a micro SD card is
formatted for the T12K, all pre-existing
data is destroyed. Do not format a card
containing important data.
[Formatting procedure]
1.Insert the micro SD card into the micro SD
card slot of the T12K.
2.T u r n o n t h e T 1 2 K p o w e r . W h e n a n
unformatted card is inserted into the T12K,
the screen shown below appears.
3.If the T12K is ready to format, move the
cursor to [FORMAT] and touch the RTN
button. (To cancel formatting, move the
cursor to [CANCEL] and touch the RTN
button.)
4.Move the cursor to [YES] and touch the RTN
button.
*F ormatting starts. During formatting, the [NOW
FORMATTING...] message is displayed.
*When formatting is completed, The [FORMAT
COMPLETED] message is displayed. Depending on the
card capacity and speed, formatting may take as long as
several minutes.
30 <Before Use>
micro SD card reader/writer
You can transfer model data and Futaba update
files from your PC to the T12K using a micro
SD card. SD card reading/writing equipment is
available at most electronics stores.
Stored data
If you have a problem saving or reading data
after a long period of use, we suggest obtaining a
new micro SD card to avoid further difficulties.
*Futaba is not responsible for compensating any failure or
damage to the data stored in the memory card. As such,
we suggest that you maintain a backup of your important
data contained on your micro SD card.
Receiver Nomenclature
Before using the receiver, be sure to read the precautions
listed in the following pages.
Danger
Receiver
Receiver R3008SB
Do not connect either a switch
or battery in this manner.
Danger
Connector
"1 through 6": outputs for the channels 1
through 6
"7/B": outputs of 7 channels and power.
(7/B)
7CH servo
Don't connect in the manner shown in the
figure above.
*If connected in this way, the device will short-circuit. A
short circuit may cause abnormal heating, fire, and/or burns.
Don't connect servo for conventional
system to S.BUS/S.BUS2 port.
*Digital servos for conventional systems do not operate.
*Analog servos may cause abnormal heat, fires, and/or burns.
Warning
Y-harness
S.BUS2 connectors
Battery
"8/SB": outputs of 8 channels or S.BUS port.
[S.BUS Servo S.BUS Gyro ]
*When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you have to set
CH MODE of the following page to mode B/D/E.
"S.BUS2": outputs of S.BUS2 port.
[S.BUS2 Servo S.BUS2 Gyro Telemetry Sensor ]
*When using 8 or more channels, use an S.BUS
function or use a second R3008SB and link both
to your transmitter.
Don't connect an S.BUS servo / gyro to
S.BUS2 connector.
LED Monitor
This monitor is used to check the CH mode of
the receiver.
Mode Switch
Use the small plastic screwdriver that was
included with your receiver.
Switch is also used for the CH mode selection.
Connector insertion
Firmly insert the connector in the direction
shown in the figure. Insert the S.BUS2 by turning
it 90 degrees.
Extra Voltage Connector
+
-
<Before Use>
31
Extra Voltage Connector
How to change the R3008SB Channel mode
Use this connector when using a voltage
telemetry device to send the battery voltage (DC0
~ 70V) from the receiver to the transmitter.
You will need to purchase the optional External
Voltage input cable (CA-RVIN-700) FUTM5551.
You can then make a cable with an extra
connector to the External voltage connector.
The R3008SB is capable of changing its channel
allocations as described in the table below.
1. Turn on the receiver. (At this moment, the
transmitter should be off.) The LED will blink
RED in about 3 seconds. Next, wait until it
becomes solid RED.
2. Press and hold the Mode Switch for more 5
seconds.
3. Release the button when the LED blinks
RED and GREEN simultaneously.
4. The receiver is now in the "Operation
CH Set" mode. At this moment, the LED
indicates current set status through flashing
a pattern that corresponds to the CH
mode.
Danger
Don't touch wiring.
* There is a danger of receiving an electric shock.
Don't short-circuit the battery terminals.
* A short circuit across the battery terminals may cause
abnormal heating, fire and burns.
Please double check your polarity ( + and
- ) when hooking up your connectors.
* If + and - of wiring are mistaken, it will damage,
ignite and explode.
Don’t connect to Extra Voltage before
turning on a receiver power supply.
R3008SB CH MODE
The R3008SB receiver is a very versatile
unit. It has 8 PWM outputs, S.BUS and S.BUS2
outputs. Additionally, the PWM outputs can
be changed from channels 1-8 to channels
8-12(DG1,DG2). If you only desire to use it as
a 7-channel receiver (without S.BUS), it can be
used without any setting changes.
*Cannot exit this CH setting mode before the operation
mode is fixed.
*See the table below for LED flash codes and "CH mode"
meanings.
*Default CH mode is "Mode B".
5. By pressing the Mode Switch, the operation
CH is switched sequentially as "Mode C"
"Mode D" "Mode E" "Mode A"....
6. Set your desired operation mode by
holding the Mode Switch button for more
than two seconds when you reach the
desired mode.
7. Release the button when the LED blinks
RED and GREEN simultaneously. Then, the
operation CH is fixed.
8. Confirm that the CH mode is changed, turn
off the receiver, and then turn it back on.
*The "Operation CH Set" mode cannot be exited while the
receiver is connecting with the transmitter.
R3008SB CH Mode table
Output
connector
Channel
1
Mode A
1 ~ 8CH
1
Mode B
1 ~ 7CH
1
Mode C
9 ~ 10CH
9
Mode D
9 ~ 10CH
9
Mode E
8 ~ 10CH
8
2
2
2
10
10
9
3
3
3
11
11
10
4
4
4
12
12
11
5
5
5
DG1
DG1
12
6
6
6
DG2
DG2
DG1
7/B
7
7
8/SB
8
S.BUS
-
S.BUS
S.BUS
Red LED blink
1 time
2 times
3 times
4 times
5 times
Default CH mode
32 <Before Use>
-
-
DG2
Receiver's Antenna Installation
The R3008SB has two antennas. In order to maximize signal operation for safe modeling,
Futaba uses a diversity antenna system. This system allows the receiver to use signals from both
antenna and fly safely.
*Must be kept as straight as possible.
Antenna
Coaxial cable
R3008SB Receiver
For best results, please follow these instructions:
1. To maximize range, keep the antennae as
straight as possible.
2. Place the two antennae at a 90 degree
angle to each other.
Antenna
For best results, please keep the antennas
to keep the antennas away from each
other as much as possible.
Larger models can have large metal
objects that can attenuate the RF signal. In
this case, the antennas should be placed
at both sides of the model. That way the
best RF signal condition is obtained at any
flying attitude.
3. The antennas must be kept away from
conductive materials, such as metal,
carbon and fuel tanks by at least half an
inch. The coaxial part of the antennas does
not need to follow these guidelines, but be
sure not to bend it in a tight radius.
4. Keep the antennas away from the motor,
ESC, and other noise sources as much as
possible.
Antenna
*The two antennas should be placed at 90 degrees to each other.
*The Illustration demonstrates how the antenna should be placed.
*Receiver Vibration and Waterproofing: The receiver contains precision electronic parts. Be sure to avoid vibration, shock,
and temperature extremes. For protection, wrap the receiver in foam rubber or other vibration-absorbing materials. It is
also a good idea to waterproof the receiver by placing it in a plastic bag and securing the open end of the bag with a rubber
band before wrapping it with foam rubber. If you accidentally get moisture or fuel inside the receiver, you may experience
intermittent operation or a crash. If necessary, return the receiver to our service center for repairs.
<Before Use>
33
Safety precautions when you install receiver
and servos
Mounting the Servo
Wood screw
2.3-2.6mm nut
washer
Rubber
grommet
Brass eyelet
Rubber
grommet
Brass eyelet
Servo mount
Servo mount
2.3-2.6mm screw
(Airplane/Glider)
(Helicopter)
Servo lead wires
To prevent the servo lead cable from being
broken by vibration during flight, provide a
little slack in the cable and fasten it at suitable
points. Periodically check the cable during daily
maintenance.
Warning
Connecting connectors
Be sure to insert the connector until it
stops at the deepest point.
How to protect the receiver from vibration
and water
Wrap the receiver with something soft,
such as foam rubber, to avoid vibration.
If there is a chance of getting wet, put the
receiver in a waterproof bag or balloon to
avoid water.
Receiver's antenna
Never cut the receiver's antenna. Do not
bind the receiver's antenna with servo
cables.
Place the receiver's antenna as far as
possible from metals or carbon fiber
components, such as frames, cables, etc.
Margin in the lead wire.
Fasten about 5-10 cm
from the servo outlet so
that the lead wire is neat.
Mounting the power switch
When mounting a power switch to an airframe,
make a rectangular hole that is a little larger than
the total stroke of the switch so that you can turn
the switch ON/OFF without binding.
Avoid mounting the switch where it can be
covered by engine oil and dust. In general, it is
recommended to mount the power switch on the
side of the fuselage that is opposite the muffler.
*Cutting or binding the receiver's antenna will reduce the
radio’s reception sensitivity and range, and may cause a
crash.
Servo throw
Adjust your system so that pushrods will
not bind or sag when operating the servos
to the full extent.
*If excessive force is continuously applied to a servo, the
servo could be damaged due to force on the gear train
and/or power consumption, causing rapid battery drain.
Mounting servos
Use vibration-proof rubber (such as a
rubber grommet) under a servo when
mounting the servo on a servo mount.
Be sure that the servo cases do not touch
directly to the metal parts, such as a servo
mount.
*If the servo case contacts the airframe directly, vibration
will travel to and possibly damage the servo.
34 <Before Use>
S.BUS/S.BUS2 Installation
This set uses the S.BUS/S.BUS2 system. The wiring is as simplified and streamlined as possible, even
with models that use a large number of servos. The wings can quickly be attached to the fuselage with one
simple wire, even when a large number of servos are used.
●When using S.BUS/S.BUS2, special settings and mixes in your transmitter may be unnecessary.
●S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos memorize the number of channels themselves. (Settable with the T12K)
●The S.BUS/S.BUS2 system and conventional system (receiver conventional CH used) can be mixed.
S.BUS Glider usage example
Receiver: R3008SB
Servo: S3172SV×9 ( Or similar)
HUB×4 ( Optional )
Throttle servo: BLS173SV ( Or similar )
Battery: FR2F1800 ( Or similar )
S.BUS Aerobatic plane usage example
Switch: HSW-L
Receiver: R3008SB
Aileron servo: BLS174SV×2 ( Or similar )
HUB×3 ( Optional )
Rudder Servo: BLS175SV×1 ( Or similar)
Elevator servo: BLS173SVi×2 ( Or similar )
<Before Use>
35
S.BUS Wiring example
Receiver *When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you must set the receiver to
Mode B,D,E. See R3008SB CH MODE TABLE.
●S.BUS Servo
Since the channel number is memorized by
the S.BUS itself, any connector can be used.
When the SBD-1 or SBD-2 (sold separately)
is used, ordinary servos can be used with the
S.BUS system.
Battery
(8/SB)
Switch
S.BUS
Extension
cord
Terminal box
●Terminal box
Four connectors can be inserted
HUB
HUB
HUB
●Terminal box TB16PP
6 connectors can be inserted
Warning
Power supply
S.BUS Servo
Please make sure that you
use a battery that can deliver
enough capacity for the
number and kind of servos
used. Alkaline batteries
cannot be used.
HUB
(Another power supply)
Switch
HUB
●When separate power supply used
HUB
Battery
When a large number of servos are used or
when high current servos are used, the servos
can be driven by a separate power supply by
using a separate Power Supply 3-way Hub.
S.BUS Servo
Green
HUB
Orange
HUB
36 <Before Use>
Three connectors can be
inserted.
Used when using a separate
power supply battery.
S.BUS2 System
When using the S.BUS2 port, an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized.
S.BUS2 TABLE
Receiver port
S.BUS Servo
S.BUS Gyro
S.BUS2 Servo
S.BUS2 Gyro
Telemetry sensor
S.BUS
○
○
×
S.BUS2
× (※)
○
○
(※)Don't connect S.BUS Servo,
S.BUS Gyro to S.BUS2 connector.
S.BUS servos and gyros and S.BUS2 servos and gyros must be used in the
correct receiver ports. Please refer to the instruction manual to make sure
you connect to the correct one.
CH Mode is set to ModeB [D,E].
S.BUS
Port
(8/SB)
S.BUS2
Port
Hub
Hub
S.BUS Servo
S.BUS2 servo
connection is possible
S.BUS2 gyro
connection is possible
Telemetry sensor
connection is impossible
Hub
Hub
S.BUS2 Servo
Telemetry
Sensor
S.BUS servo
connection is impossible
S.BUS2
GYRO
+
Rudder Servo
<Before Use>
37
Telemetry System
The R3008SB receiver features bi-directional communication with a T-FHSS Air Futaba transmitter
using the S.BUS2 port. Using the S.BUS2 port, an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized.
It also includes both standard PWM output ports and S.BUS output ports.
* Telemetry is available only in the T-FHSS Air.
* The telemetry function requires the corresponding receiver (R3008SB).
* The T12K will enter and keep the ID number of the R3008SB that it is linked to.
* When using multiple receivers with one transmitter, telemetry cannot be used.
●Telemetry sensor (sold separately)
T12K
Aircraft data can be checked in the transmitter by
connecting various telemetry sensors to the S.BUS2
connector of the receiver.
Info
Signal
Power battery voltage is
displayed at the transmitter.
Info
voltage
Receiver
S.BUS2
Connector
Battery voltage is
displayed at the transmitter.
Switch
Info
Terminal box
Info
HUB
Servos are classified by channel, but sensors
are classified by “slot”. Since the initial slot
number of the T12K is preset at each sensor,
the sensors can be used as is by connecting
them. There are 1~31 slots.
38 <Before Use>
Slot 1
RPM
Sensor
Slot 2
Altitude
Sensor
Slot 3 ~ 5
Voltage
Sensor
Info
HUB
●Slot No.
Temperature
Sensor
Info
HUB
GPS
Sensor
Slot 6 ~ 7
Slot 8 ~ 15
***Sensor
Slot 16
***Sensor
Slot 17
Slot 31
BASIC OPERATION
How to turn transmitter power ON/OFF
When turning on the power, the T12K transmitter will begin emmiting RF automatically after it confirms
the surrounding RF conditions.
The T12K transmitter also offers the ability to auto shutdown.
When turning on the power of the transmitter
First, make sure the throttle stick is in the low
throttle position.
Push up to turn on.
2.Then, you will see the home screen and the
transmitter begins to emit radio waves.
*If the throttle stick is not in the low position,
you'll have an alarm until the stick is in the
low position. (In the case of Multicopter mode,
throttle position alarm does not occur.)
How to stop the transmitter
1.Turn off the power switch of the transmitter.
*The transmitter shuts down at once.
Low battery alarm and auto shutdown
When the battery voltage reaches 5.6V, an audible
alarm will sound. Land your aircraft immediately.
When the battery voltage reaches 4.0V, the
transmitter will be turned off automatically.
1. Turn on the power switch of the transmitter.
*The message "CHECK RF CONDITION" is displayed for a
moment. At the same time, the LED monitor blinks.
*If you do not operate the transmitter (or move a stick,
knob, switch, or digital trim) for 30 minutes, the message
"PLEASE TURN OFF POWER SWITCH" is displayed and
an audible alarm will sound.
User name registration
If desired, the T12K transmitter can indicate the
owner's name.
User name setup screen
1. Turn on the power of the transmitter.
*The home screen appears.
2. Lightly push the SYS button twice rapidly and
the System menu appears.
3. Select [USER NAME] in the System menu and
push the RTN button.
*The user name set up screen appears.
Changing the user name
1. Change the user name as described below:
[Moving cursor in input box]
Select [←] or [→] and push the RTN button.
[Deleting a character]
When [DELETE] is selected and the RTN
button is pushed, the character immediately
after the cursor is deleted.
[Adding a character]
When a character is selected from the
character list and the RTN button is pushed,
that character is added at the position
immediately after the cursor.
*A name up to 10 characters long can be entered as the user
name. (A space is counted as one character.)
Input Box
*Current user name is displayed.
2. At the end of input, select [ENTER] and touch
the RTN button. (To terminate input and
return to the original state, select [CANCEL]
and push the RTN button.)
<Basic Operation>
39
Home Screen
Use the Push dial to select the following display area to call each setting screen, and push the RTN
button. The setting screen appears.
System timer
Key lock
• This shows the accumulated time since
the latest reset. (Hour):(Minute)
• Use the cursor to highlight this, then
push the RTN button for one second
to reset the system timer.
• Push the S1 button or push the HOME/
EXIT button for one second to lock/
unlock the key operation.
In the key lock mode the key icon is
displayed here.
Up/Down timer (ST1, ST2)
• Timer is displayed here.
Push the RTN button at the [xx]:[xx.xx]
item to start/stop the timer.
• Use the cursor to highlight this, then
push the RTN button at the ST1 or ST2
item to call the timer setup screen.
*See the description at the back of this manual.
User name
RF indicator
System mode
• System(T-FHSS Air or S-FHSS)
mode is displayed here.
• Use the cursor to highlight this,
then push the RTN button to call
the frequency set-up screen.
Digital trim (T1 to T4)
• Trim position is displayed here.
• You can select the display unit
on the home screen on the
T1-T4 setting screen within the
linkage menu.
2nd Home screen
• Push the RTN button at
the clock icon to call the
2 nd home screen (large
size timer).
40 <Basic Operation>
micro SD card indicator
Battery Indicator
• When the battery voltage
reaches 5.6V(Change in
Warning Menu), the alarm
will beep. Land your aircraft
immediately.
Model type
Model Name
• The model name that
is currently used is
displayed here.
• Use the cursor to
highlight this, then
push the RTN button
to call the model
select set-up screen.
Model timer
• This shows the accumulated time
since the latest reset. (each model)
(Hour):(Minute)
• Use the cursor to highlight this, then
push the RTN button for one second
to reset the model timer.
Condition name (Heli/Glider)
• In the normal condition, move the
cursor to the condition name and
push the RTN button. The condition
name is changed and blinks.
It is possible to operate the digital
trim in all conditions.
VPP condition # (Air)
• When VPP function is assigned to a
channel, the current VPP condition
# is displayed here.
User Menu
A user menu which allows the user to
customize and display frequently used
functions.
1.When the "U.MENU" button is pushed for
two seconds, the user menu appears.
*Return to the home screen by pushing the EXIT button
while the user menu is being displayed.
Warning
Be sure to confirm the model name before
flying your aircraft.
Check the battery voltage as often as
possible and try to charge the battery
earlier. If the battery alarm makes a sound,
land your aircraft immediately.
2.When the cursor highlights the dotted line,
"----------" and the RTN button is pushed,
the menu selection screen appears.
3.When the cursor is moved to the setting
that you to set to the user menu and the
RTN button is pushed, that setting screen
is added to the user menu.
4.The registered setting screen can be
called by moving the cursor to it and
pushing the RTN button.
*When you want to delete an added screen from the user
menu, highlight item you wish to delete, push and hold
the RTN button for one second.
<Basic Operation>
41
Link procedure T-FHSS Air (T12K/R3008SB)
Each transmitter has an individually assigned, unique ID code. In order to start operation, the receiver
must be linked with the ID code of the transmitter with which it is being paired. Once the link is made,
the ID code is stored in the receiver and no further linking is necessary unless the receiver is to be used
with another transmitter. When you purchase additional R3008SB receivers, this procedure is necessary;
otherwise the receiver will not work.
the transmitter and the receiver close
1 Place
to each other within a half (0.5m) meter.
Less than 0.5 m
2 Set transmitter to link mode.
Call setup screen
Push Dial
R3008SB OFF
T12K ON
LINKAGE MENU
Scroll
Cursor to the SYSTEM
PUSH
Home
PUSH
Push RTN
Long Push
To link mode
Scroll
Cursor to the LINK
NOW LINKING. . .
When changing
battery fail-safe
voltage from
the initial value
3.8V, voltage is
changed here.
PUSH
Push RTN
Link mode
The chime rings.
Release in 10 seconds.
Immediately turn on the receiver power.
3 The
receiver will enter the linking state
(LED blinks red) about 3 seconds after the
receiver power is turned on.
In "Link" Mode
Receiver ON
receiver ID is displayed in the transmitter and the LED changed from red blinking to
4 aIf the
steady green light, linking is complete. (The receiver linking wait state ends in about 3
seconds.)
5 Check system operation. If the transmitter and receiver are not linked, try linking again.
*If there are many T-FHSS Air systems turned on in close proximity, your receiver might have difficulty establishing a link to your
transmitter. This is a rare occurrence. However, should another T-FHSS Air transmitter/receiver be linking at the same time,
your receiver could link to the wrong transmitter. This is very dangerous if you do not notice this situation. In order to avoid the
problem,we strongly recommend you double check whether your receiver is really under control by your transmitter.
*When the power of the linked transmitter is turned on, communication begins.
*When using 2 receivers, perform the linking operation the same as the 1st receiver. (However, when 2 receivers are used, the
telemetry system cannot be used.)
*Link is required when a new model is made from a model selection.
42 <Basic Operation>
If the receiver's voltage does not display on the transmitter
◆ When the receiver has the transmitter's ID in memory, a link is established and normal
operation is allowed.
◆ When the transmitter has the receiver's ID in memory, a link is established and
telemetry functions are usable.
The transmitter stores receiver IDs by model; thus, if it does not have a particular
receiver model ID stored in memory or has a different receiver ID stored, telemetry
functions will be unusable. However, the device is operable as long as the receiver has
the transmitter's ID stored in memory.
Link of model 1
Model 1 → Model 2
Model 1: Receiver ID: xxxxxx1
Model 2: Receiver ID: --------Model 3: Receiver ID: ---------
Link
Tx ID: xxxxxx2
Device is operable if receiver
has transmitter's ID stored in
memory
Rx ID: xxxxxx1
Operable
Model 1: Receiver ID: xxxxxx1
Model 2: Receiver ID: --------Model 3: Receiver ID: ---------
Tx ID: xxxxxx2
stored
Telemetry usable
Receiver ID: xxxxxx1
stored for Model 1
Telemetry functions unusable because
Model 2 does not have receiver's ID
stored in memory.
Transmitter switched to Model 2 and
link reestablished
Tx ID: xxxxxx2
stored
Link
Rx ID: xxxxxx1
Model 1: Receiver ID: xxxxxx1
Model 2: Receiver ID: xxxxxx1
Model 3: Receiver ID: ---------
Because receiver IDs will be stored
in the memory of each transmitter
model, it is unnecessary to
reestablish a link once the receiver
ID has been stored in memory for
a given model.
Telemetry usable
Rx ID: xxxxxx1
When setting up a new model, before using it, first
establish a link with the receiver that will be used
with it.
<Basic Operation>
43
Link procedure S-FHSS (T12K/Optional S-FHSS receiver)
If the receiver of S-FHSS is used, the methods of a link differ.
*When using an optional receiver, a link is necessary.
*Follow the manual of the receiver to be used. Moreover, carry out an operating check.
*Telemetry function cannot be used for the S-FHSS receiver.
Receiver link method in S-FHSS
1 Place the transmitter and the receiver close
Less than 0.5 m
to each other within a half (0.5m) meter.
2 Turn on the transmitter.
3 Turn on the receiver.
4 Push and hold the Link switch more than two(2) seconds. When the link is complete, the LED
in the receiver changes to solid green. When the ID cannot be read due to the surrounding
environment, try reading it with the transmitter and receiver antennas pushed.
Optional S-FHSS receiver
5 Check system operation. If the transmitter and receiver are not linked, try linking again.
*If there are many S-FHSS systems turned on in close proximity, your receiver might have difficulty establishing a link to your
transmitter. This is a rare occurrence. However, should another S-FHSS transmitter/receiver be linking at the same time, your
receiver could link to the wrong transmitter. This is very dangerous if you do not notice this situation. In order to avoid the
problem,we strongly recommend you double check whether your receiver is really under control by your transmitter.
*When the power of the linked transmitter is turned on, communication begins.
*When using 2 receivers, perform the linking operation the same as the 1st receiver.
WARNING
After the linking is done, please cycle
receiver power and check that the receiver
to be linked is really under the control of
the transmitter.
Don't perform the linking procedure with
the main motor wire connected or with
the engine operating. Serious injury might
occur.
44 <Basic Operation>
Range Testing Your R/C System
It is extremely important to range check your models prior to each flying session. This enables you to
ensure that everything is functioning as it should for maximum enjoyment from your flying time. The T12K
transmitter incorporates a system that reduces its power output and allows you to perform such a range
check.
Range check mode
Range check procedure
We have installed a special "Range check
mode" for doing a ground range check. To access
the "Range check mode" touch and hold the RTN
button while turning on the transmitter. Doing so
will bring up POWER MODE menu.
1. With the "Range check mode" on, walk
away from the model while simultaneously
operating the controls. Have an assistant
stand by the model to confirm that all
controls are completely and correctly
operational. You should be able to walk
approximately 30-50 paces from the model
without losing control.
2. If everything operates correctly, return to
the model. Set the transmitter in a safe yet
accessible location so it will be within reach
after starting the engine or motor. Be certain
the throttle stick is in the low throttle position,
then start the engine or motor. Perform
another range check with your assistant
holding the aircraft with the engine running
at various speeds. If the servos jitter or move
inadvertently, there may be a problem. We
would strongly suggest you do not fly until the
source of the difficulty has been determined.
Look for loose servo connections or binding
pushrods. Also, be certain that the battery
has been fully charged.
First, Push to RTN.
Next, Push up to turn on.
PUSH
The present model
To activate the "Range check mode" touch the
RTN button and the range check mode screen will
appear.
Range checking on
low power.
About 100 feet
During this mode, the RF power output is
reduced so the range test can be performed. In
addition, when this mode is activated the LED on
the front of the transmitter starts blinking and the
transmitter gives users a warning with a beeping
sound every 3 seconds.
The "Range check mode" continues for 90
seconds. After that, power will return to normal.
To exit the "Range check mode" before 90 seconds,
select "RANGE CHECK" at the top of the screen
and touch the RTN button again. This mode is
only available one time, so, if you need to reuse
the function, transmitter power must be cycled.
NEVER start flying when the "Range check mode"
is active.
Should you require additional time to perform
a range check, highlight Restart before your time
expires and press the RTN button one time.
Range check mode
Warning
Do not fly in range check mode.
*Since the range of the radio waves is short, if the model
is too far from the transmitter, control will be lost and
the model will crash.
<Basic Operation>
45
Servo connection by model type
The T12K transmitter channels are automatically assigned for optimal combination according to the type
selected with the Model Type function of the Linkage Menu. The channel assignment (initial setting) for
each model type is shown below. Connect the receiver and servos to match the type used.
*The set channels can be checked at the Function screen of the Linkage Menu. The channel assignments can also be changed. For
more information, read the description of the Function menu.
Airplane/glider
Normal wing and V-tail
2Aileron
2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
1
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
2
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
3
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
4
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
5
Gear
AUX7
Gear
AUX7
Gear
AUX6
Gear
AUX5
Flap
Flap
Aileron3
Aileron3
6
VPP
AUX6
Aileron2
Aileron2
Flap
Flap
Aileron2
Aileron2
Flap2
Flap2
Aileron4
Aileron4
7
AUX5
AUX5
VPP
AUX6
Aileron2
Aileron2
Flap
Flap
Flap3
Flap3
Flap
Flap
8
AUX4
AUX4
AUX5
AUX5
VPP
AUX5
Flap2
Flap2
Flap4
Flap4
Flap2
Flap2
9
AUX1
AUX1
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
10
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
Butterfly
AUX1
Butterfly
VPP
Butterfly
Gear
Butterfly
Gear
Butterfly
11
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
12
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
VPP
AUX1
VPP
AUX1
DG1
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
DG2
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
S-FHSS
Glider
T-FHSS Air
Airplane
The output
CH of each
system
RX
CH
1Aileron
Ailvator (Dual Elevator)
2Aileron
2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
1
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
2
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
3
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
4
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
5
Gear
AUX7
Gear
AUX7
Gear
AUX6
Elevator2
Elevator2
Flap
Flap
Aileron3
Aileron3
Aileron4
6
VPP
AUX6
Aileron2
Aileron2
Flap
Flap
Aileron2
Aileron2
Flap2
Flap2
Aileron4
7
Elevator2
Elevator2
Elevator2
Elevator2
Aileron2
Aileron2
Flap
Flap
Flap3
Flap3
Flap
Flap
8
AUX4
AUX4
VPP
AUX5
Elevator2
Elevator2
Flap2
Flap2
Flap4
Flap4
Flap2
Flap2
9
AUX1
AUX1
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
10
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
Butterfly
VPP
Butterfly
Gear
Butterfly
Gear
Butterfly
Gear
Butterfly
11
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
VPP
AUX1
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
12
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
Elevator2
Elevator2
Elevator2
Elevator2
DG1
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
DG2
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
46 <Receiver and Servo Installation>
S-FHSS
Glider
T-FHSS Air
Airplane
The output
CH of each
system
RX
CH
1Aileron
Airplane/glider
Flying wing, Delta wing
2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
1
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
2
VPP
AUX4
VPP
AUX4
VPP
AUX4
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
3
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
Rudder
Rudder
Aileron3
Aileron3
4
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
VPP
AUX4
Aileron4
Aileron4
5
Gear
AUX7
Gear
AUX6
Gear
AUX6
Flap
Flap
Rudder
Rudder
6
Aileron2
Aileron2
Flap
Flap
Flap
Flap
Flap2
Flap2
VPP
AUX4
7
AUX6
AUX6
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
Flap3
Flap3
Flap
Flap
8
AUX5
AUX5
AUX5
AUX5
Flap2
Flap2
Flap4
Flap4
Flap2
Flap2
9
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
10
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
11
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
Butterfly
AUX1
Butterfly
Gear
Butterfly
Gear
Butterfly
12
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
DG1
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
DG2
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
Airplane
Glider
2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
Airplane
Glider
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Aileron
Rudder2
Rudder2
Rudder2
Rudder2
Rudder2
Rudder2
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
3
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
Rudder
Rudder
Aileron3
Aileron3
4
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder
Rudder2
Rudder2
Aileron4
Aileron4
5
Gear
AUX7
Gear
AUX6
Gear
AUX6
Flap
Flap
Rudder
Rudder
6
Aileron2
Aileron2
Flap
Flap
Flap
Flap
Flap2
Flap2
Rudder2
Rudder2
7
VPP
AUX6
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
Aileron2
Flap3
Flap3
Flap
Flap
8
AUX5
AUX5
VPP
AUX5
Flap2
Flap2
Flap4
Flap4
Flap2
Flap2
9
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
Elevator
10
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
Camber
11
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
Butterfly
VPP
Butterfly
Gear
Butterfly
Gear
Butterfly
12
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
Throttle
Motor
Throttle
Motor
DG1
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
DG2
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
S-FHSS
Aileron
2
T-FHSS Air
1
The output
CH of each
system
RX
CH
2Aileron
S-FHSS
Glider
T-FHSS Air
Airplane
The output
CH of each
system
RX
CH
2Aileron
*Different systems have different output channels. A system with few channels will have wing
types which cannot be used. If a function is outside of the range of the arrow for the system to
the right of the figure above, that function cannot be used by that system.
<Receiver and Servo Installation>
47
Helicopter
All Other
H-4, H4X Swash
Aileron
Elevator
Elevator
3
Throttle
Throttle
4
Rudder
Rudder
5
Gyro/RUD
Gyro/RUD
6
Pitch
Pitch
7
Governor
Governor
8
Needle
Elevator2
9
Gyro2/AIL
Gyro2/AIL
10
Gyro3/ELE
Gyro3/ELE
11
AUX1
AUX1
12
AUX1
AUX1
DG1
SW
SW
DG2
SW
SW
CH
Multicopter
1
Aileron
2
Elevator
3
Throttle
4
Rudder
5
MODE
Multicopter
8
REC
9
AUX1
10
AUX1
11
AUX1
12
AUX1
DG1
SW
DG2
SW
48 <Receiver and Servo Installation>
S-FHSS
PAN
T-FHSS Air
TILT
7
The output
CH of each
system
6
S-FHSS
Aileron
2
T-FHSS Air
1
The output
CH of each
system
CH
MODEL BASIC SETTING PROCEDURE
Airplane/glider basic setting procedure
1. Model addition and selection
Initially, the T12K assigns the first model to
model-01 in the transmitter. The Model Select
function of the Linkage Menu is used to add
models and to select amongst models which are
already set.
3. Fuselage linkage
Connect the ailerons, elevators, throttle, rudder,
etc. in accordance with the model's instruction
manual. For a description of the connection
method, see the Receiver and Servos Connection.
The T12K is capable of storing data for up to 30
models in its internal memory. Additional model
data can also be saved to an optional micro SD
card.
The currently selected model name is displayed
in the center of the home screen. Before flying and
before changing any settings, always confirm the
model name.
When a new model is added, the Model type
select screen and System mode setup screen
automatically appear. Please be aware that the
transmitter will stop transmitting temporarily when
you change the model.
When a new model is added, you will need to relink the receiver.
Note that even for the same "airplane
model", when the wing type and tail type
are different, the channel assignment may
be different. (The channel assigned to each
function can be checked at the Function
menu of the Linkage Menu.)
● If the direction of the servo is incorrect, adjust
the direction with the Reverse function of the
Linkage Menu.
● Adjust the neutral position and control
surface angle with the linkage, and fine
tune them with the Sub-Trim and End Point
functions (angle adjustment). To protect the
linkage, a limit position can also be set with
the End Point function. The End Point function
can adjust the amount of up/down and left/
right movement and limit of each channel.
2. Model type selection
Select the model type matched to the aircraft
with the Model Type select function of the Linkage
Menu. For an airplane, select the model type from
among the 2 types: airplane and glider. And then
select the wing type and the tail type matched to
the aircraft.
<Receiver and Servo Installation>
49
4. Throttle cut setting (Airplane)
Throttle cut can be performed with one push by a
switch without changing the throttle trim position.
Set throttle cut with the Throttle Cut function of
the Linkage Menu. After activating the throttle cut
function and selecting the switch, adjust the throttle
position so that the carburetor fully closes. For
safety, the throttle cut function operates the throttle
stick in the 1/3 or less (slow side) position.
5. Idle down setting (Airplane)
The idling speed can be lowered with one push
by a switch without changing the throttle trim
position. Perform this setting with the Idle Down
function of the Linkage Menu. After activating the
Idle Down function and selecting the switch, adjust
the idle down speed. For safety, the idle down
function acts only when the throttle stick is in the
lowest part of its throw.
(Glider)
7. Airbrake (Airplane)
This function is used when an airbrake is
necessary when taking off or diving, etc. Please
note: this menu item is only available under certain
wing configurations. For example, it will not appear
if a single aileron wing type has been selected.
The preset elevator and flap offset amount can be
activated by a switch.
The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, and
flap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also, the
speed of the aileron, elevator, and flap servos can
be adjusted. You can also set the Auto Mode, which
will link Airbrake to a stick, switch, or dial. A
separate stick switch or dial can also be set as the
ON/OFF switch.
*While the Throttle Cut function is in operation, the Idle
Down function does not work.
8. Addition of flight conditions (Glider)
6. D/R function
D/R function is used to adjust the throw and
operation curve of the stick functions (aileron,
elevator, rudder, and throttle) for each switch
position (airplane) or each flight condition (glider).
This is normally used after the modeler has defined
the maximum throw directions in the End Point
settings.
(Airplane)
The Condition Select function automatically
allocates the normal condition (NORMAL) for
each model. NORMAL is the default condition and
is the only one active when a new model type is
defined.
If you want to add flight conditions, please refer
to a description of the CONDITION function.
*The NORMAL is always on, and remains on until other
conditions are activated by switches, stick positions, etc.
Please refer to the section called Switch Selection Method
for additional information on how to do so.
*It is possible to customize the activation of the flight
conditions.
*The Condition Delay can be programmed for each channel.
The Condition Delay is used to change the servo throw
smoothly when switching conditions.
50 <Receiver and Servo Installation>
Helicopter basic setting procedure
This section outlines examples of use of the helicopter functions of the T12K. Adjust the actual values,
etc. to match the fuselage used.
1. Model addition and selection
Initially, the T12K assigns the first model to
model-01 in the transmitter. To add new models
or to select a model already programmed, use the
Model Select function of the Linkage Menu.
appropriate output channels, control functions, and mixing
functions for the chosen model type. Six swash types are
available for helicopters.
*For a description of the swash type selection, refer to the
MODEL TYPE function.
3. Flight condition addition
The transmitter offers up to five flight conditions
per model.
This is convenient when selecting a model after
entering the model names in advance. The T12K
is capable of storing up to 30 models in internal
memory. Additional models can also be stored in an
optional micro SD card.
The currently selected model is displayed in
the middle of the screen. Before flying and before
changing any settings, always confirm the model
name.
When a new model is added, the Model Type select
screen and system mode setup screen automatically
appear. Change or check that they match the swash
type and receiver type of the model used.
When a new model is added, you will need to relink the receiver.
2. Model type and swash type selection
If a different model type is already selected,
select helicopter with the Model Type function
of the Linkage Menu, then select the swash type
matched to the helicopter.
The Condition Select function automatically
allocates five conditions for helicopters.
(Initial setting)
● NORMAL
● IDLE UP1 (SW-E)
● IDLE UP2 (SW-E)
● IDLE UP3 (SW-F)
●HOLD (Hold switch is not assigned initially)
Note: Since you may accidentally activate
previous flight conditions during a later flight
and cause a crash, we suggest deleting
unused conditions.
*For a description of condition deletion, refer to the Condition
Select function.
The NORMAL condition is always on, and
remains on until other conditions are activated by
switches.
The priority is throttle hold/idle up 3/idle up 2/
idle up 1/normal. Throttle hold has the highest
priority.
The Condition Delay can be programmed for
each channel and condition. The Condition Delay
is used to change the servo throw smoothly when
switching conditions.
(General flight condition setting example)
● Normal: (Use initial setting conditions/operate
when switch OFF)
Use from engine starting to hovering.
● Idle up 1: (Operate at SW-E center)
Use in stall turn, loop, and other maneuvers.
● Idle up 2: (Operate at SW-E forward side)
Use in rolls.
*The Model Type function automatically selects the
● Throttle hold: (Operate at SW-G forward side)
Use in auto rotation.
<Receiver and Servo Installation>
51
4. Servo Connection
Connect the throttle rudder, aileron, elevator,
pitch, and other servos in accordance with the
kit instruction manual. For a description of the
connection method, see "Receiver and Servos
Connection".
5. Throttle/Pitch curve setting
This function adjusts the throttle or pitch
operation curve in relation to the movement of the
throttle stick for each condition.
Note: The channel assigned to each function
can be checked at the Function menu of the
Linkage Menu.
<Throttle curve setting example>
Activate the throttle curve of each condition with
the condition select switch.
● If the direction of operation of the servo
is incorrect, use the Reverse function of
the Linkage Menu. Also use the swash AFR
function in other than the H-1 mode.
●Normal curve adjustment
Normal curve creates a basic throttle curve
centered near hovering. This curve is adjusted
together with the pitch curve (Normal) so that the
engine speed is constant and up/down control is
easiest.
●Idle up curve adjustment
The low side Throttle curve creates a curve
matched for aerobatics (loop, roll, 3D, etc.).
●Throttle hold curve adjustment
Confirm that the rate of the slowest position (0%) of
the stick is 0% (initial setting).
<Example of pitch curve setting>
● Adjust the direction of operation of the gyro.
(Gyro side function)
● Connect the throttle linkage so that the
carburetor can fully close at full trim throttle
cut.
● Adjust the neutral position at the linkage side
and fine tune with the Sub-Trim function and
End Point function. To protect the linkage,
a limit position can also be set with the End
Point function.
Activate the pitch curve of each condition with
the condition select switch.
●Pitch curve (Normal)
Make the pitch at hovering approximately +5º~6º.
Set the pitch at hovering with the stick position at
the 50% point as the standard.
*Stability at hovering may be connected to the throttle curve.
Adjustment is easy by using the hovering throttle function
and hovering pitch function together.
●Pitch curve (Idle up 1)
The idle up 1 pitch curve function creates a curve
matched to airborne flight.
Set to -7º~+12º as standard.
●Pitch curve (Idle up 2)
The high side pitch setting is less than idle up 1.
The standard is +8º.
●Pitch curve (Hold)
At auto rotation, use the maximum pitch at both
the high and low sides.
[Pitch angle setting example]
Throttle hold: -7º~+12º
● Swash plate correction (Except H-1 mode)
*If any interactions are noticed, for a description of the
linkage correction function, please refer to the SWASH
function.
52 <Receiver and Servo Installation>
6. D/R function
D/R function is used to adjust the throw and
operation curve of aileron, elevator and rudder for
each condition.
*For throttle and pitch curve settings, refer to the aforementioned "Throttle/Pitch curve setting"
This is normally used after End Point has defined
the maximum throw directions.
Activate the Pitch to rudder (Pit -->RUD) mixing
function from the Model Menu, and set the curve
for each condition. (At initial setting, this function
is in the "INH" state. To use it, set it to the "ON"
state.)
<Setting example>
Activate the mixing curve of each condition with
the condition select switch.
A curve setting example is shown below.
●Pitch to RUD mixing curve (Normal)
Use the hovering system and set this curve to
match take off and landing and vertical climb at a
constant speed.
7. Gyro sensitivity and mode switching
●Pitch to RUD mixing (Idle up 1)
The gyro sensitivity and mode switching
function is utilized to adjust the gyro mixing of the
model, and can be set for each condition.
●Pitch to RUD mixing (Hold)
Use this curve in stall turn, loop, and adjust it so the
fuselage is facing straight ahead when heading
into the wind.
This function is set so that the fuselage is facing
straight ahead at straight line auto rotation. The
pitch of the tail rotor becomes nearly 0º.
9. Throttle hold setting
● Normal condition (hovering): Gyro sensitivity
maximum
● Idle up 1/Idle up 2/Throttle hold: Gyro
sensitivity minimum
● However, during auto rotations with a taildriven helicopter, this function may not have
any effect on the high gyro sensitivity.
8. Pitch to RUD mixing setting
Note: When using a Futaba GY Gyro, or other
heading hold gyro, this Pitch to RUD mixing
should not be used. The reaction torque is
corrected by the gyro. When operating the
gyro in the AVCS mode, the mixed signal will
cause neutral deviation symptoms and the
gyro will not operate normally.
*If throttle hold is necessary, please refer to the THR HOLD
function.
10. Throttle cut setting
Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the
engine, by flipping a switch with the throttle stick
at idle. The action is not functional at high throttle
to avoid accidental dead sticks. Switch location and
direction must be chosen, as it defaults to NULL.
*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the cut position until the
engine consistently shuts off, but throttle linkage is not
binding.
Use this function when you want to suppush the
torque generated by the changes in the pitch and
speed of the main rotor during pitch operation.
Adjust it so that the nose does not swing in the
rudder direction. However, when using a heading
hold gyro like those shown above, do not use Pitch
to rudder mixing.
11. Swash Mix corrects aileron, elevator, and
pitch interaction
The swash mix function is used to correct the
swash plate in the aileron (Left/Right Cyclic)
and elevator (Forward/Aft Cyclic) direction
corresponding to each operation of each condition.
<Receiver and Servo Installation>
53
12. Throttle mixing setting
*If throttle mixing is necessary to compensate for engine
slowing caused by swash plate operation during aileron or
elevator operation, please refer to the THROTTLE MIX
function.
13. Other special mixes
●Pitch to Needle mixing
This mixing is used with engines with a design which
allows needle control during flight (fuel-air mixture
adjustment). A needle curve can be set.
●Governor mixing
This mixing is dedicated governor mixing when a
governor is used.
54 <Receiver and Servo Installation>
SYSTEM MENU
The System Menu sets up functions of the
transmitter: This does not set up any model data.
● Call the system menu shown below by long
pushing the SYS button at the home screen,
etc.
<Push Dial>
●Select [SYSTEM MENU]
and return to the home
screen by pushing the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Access setup screen
RETURN
● Select the function you want to set and call
the setup screen by pushing the RTN button.
System Menu functions table
[TRAINER]: Starts and sets the trainer system.
[DISPLAY]: LCD and backlight adjustment.
[USER NAME]: User name registration.
[SOUND]: Turns off the buzzer.
[H/W SET]: H/W reverse, calibration, and stick mode.
[START SEL.]: Immediately, a model selection can be performed.
[AUTO LOCK]: The automatic lock function of two kinds of push dials.
[INFO]: Displays the program version, micro SD card information, product ID, and language selection.
[SBUS SERVO]: S.BUS servo setting.
<Functions of System Menu>
55
TRAINER
Trainer system starting and setting
T12K trainer system makes it possible for the
instructor to chose which channels and operation
modes can be used in the student transmitter.
The function and rate of each channel can be
set. The training method can also be matched to
the student's skill level. Two transmitters must
be connected by an optional Trainer Cord. The
instructor's transmitter should be programmed for
trainer operation, as described below.
When the instructor activates the trainer switch,
the student has control of the aircraft (if MIX/
FUNC/NORM mode is turned on, the Instructor
can make corrections while the student has control).
When the switch is released, the instructor regains
control. This is very useful if the student gets the
aircraft into an undesirable situation.
● Setting data are stored to model data.
● Student rate can be adjusted at MIX/FUNC/
NORM mode.
● Activated student channels can be selected
by switches.
NOTE: This trainer system can be used in the
following ways:
1. With the T12K and a conventional transmitter,
you must match the channel order on the
two transmitters before using the trainer
function.
You can select the channel of input data
from the student transmitter in the "FUNC" or
"MIX" mode.
2. When the T12K is used as the instructor
transmitter, set the modulation mode of the
student’s transmitter to PPM.
If used as the student, T12K can be connected
to the instructor transmitter, which must be set
to PPM mode. T12K always uses the PPM mode
to send or receive signals through the trainer
jack.
(In the case of non-2.4GHz student transmitters.)
3. Be sure that all channels work correctly in
both transmitters before flying.
Corresponding types of transmitters and trainer mode settings:
Types of transmitters
Instructor
Student
T12K/T14SG/
T16SZ/T18SZ/
T18MZ
T12K/T14SG/
T16SZ/T18SZ/
T18MZ
T14MZ, FX-40,
T12Z, T12FG,
FX-30
T12K
T12K
T12K
T12K
T12K
T14MZ, FX-40,
T12Z, T12FG,
FX-30
T8FG, FX-20
T10C, T10CG,
T9C, T7C,
T7C,T8J,T6K,
T6J
Instructor's transmitter settings
System Type
Trainer setting
Mod. mode
CH mode
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
12CH
PCM-G3
2.4G
12CH
PPM
Arbitrary
12CH
8CH
FASST-MLT2
FASST-MULT
-
-
Arbitrary
8CH
PPM
-
-
T12FG (FUTM4405)
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
8CH
8CH
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
-
-
T12FG (FUTM4405)
T12K
Arbitrary
12CH
Arbitrary
12CH
-
T12K
Arbitrary
12CH
Arbitrary
12CH
-
T12K
Arbitrary
-
Arbitrary
8CH
-
T10C, T9C,
T7C,T6EX,
T4EX
T10CG,T7C
T8J,T6K,T6J
56 <Functions of System Menu>
16CH
Trainer Cords
16CH
T8FG, FX-20
Arbitrary
Student's transmitter settings
System Type
Trainer setting
Mod. mode
CH mode
Mod. mode
T12FG (FUTM4405)
and 9C (FUTM4415)
Trainer Cords
T12FG (FUTM4405)
and 9C (FUTM4415)
Trainer Cords
● Select [TRAINER] in the System menu and enter
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
Mode and switch selection
1.Access the setup screen page 4 shown
below by pushing the S1 button three times.
is alternately turned on and off each time the switch is
operated. This allows alternate ON/OFF switching even
when a momentary switch (SH) is used.
Note: The trainer function won’t be turned
on unless the Instructor transmitter receives
signals from the student transmitter. Be
sure to confirm this after connecting your
trainer cable.
2.Move the cursor to the [ACT] or [16/12/8CH]
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
3.Select the mode by scrolling the Push dial.
The display blinks. Push the RTN button to
change the mode. (To terminate the mode
change, push the S1 button.)
"ACT": Enable operation by changing to [OFF]
or [ON].
"16/12/8 CH": When the student uses the
T12K,T14SG,T16SZ,T18SZ,T18MZ, select [16CH].
When the student uses the T14MZ, T12Z, T12FG
or FX-40, select [12CH]. Otherwise select
[8CH].
If changing the trainer switch:
4.Move the cursor to the [SW] item and push
the RTN button to access the switch setup
screen.
(See "Switch selection method" at the end of
this manual for selection method details.)
"SW": Select the desired switch.
Initial setting: SH
*The switch mode can also be selected when setting the ON
position on the switch setup screen. When [ALTERNATE
OFF] is selected, normal ON/OFF operation is performed.
When [ALTERNATE ON] is selected, the trainer function
Operating mode selection
(Setup screen page 1-3)
1.Move the cursor to the [MODE] item of the
channel you want to change and push the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2.Select the mode by scrolling the Push dial.
The display blinks. Push the RTN button to
change the mode. (To terminate the mode
change, push the S1 button.)
"MODE": Select the desired operation mode
for each channel.
NORM: The model is controlled by signals from the student
transmitter.
MIX mode: The model is controlled by signals from the
instructor and student transmitters. (Reset the student's
model data to the default condition.)
FUNC mode (function mode): The model is controlled by
signals from the student transmitter with the instructor 's
setting. (Reset the student's model data to the default
condition.)
OFF: Only the instructor side operates.
<Functions of System Menu>
57
Adjusting the student's rate.
*This can be adjusted for students who may need lower rates
than a more experienced student.
1.Move the cursor to the [RATE] item of the
channel you want to change and push the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2.Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
In case of MULTIROTOR type
■The default settings of TRAINER at
MULTIROTOR are below. It is easy to set
TRAINER when the student radio is used for
camera gimbal control.
"RATE": Adjust the desired rate.
Setting range: 0~100%
Initial value: 100%
*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, push
the RTN button for one second.
3.To end adjustment, push the RTN button and
return to the cursor mode.
Changing the student's channel
*The setting above allows setting of the channel assignment
of student side when [MIX] or [FUNC] was selected.
1.Move the cursor to the [STU. CH] item of the
channel you want to change and push the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2.Select the channel by scrolling the Push
dial. The display blinks. Push the RTN button
to change the channel. (To terminate the
mode change, push the S1 button.)
"STU. CH": Match the channel order of the
Instructor's and student's transmitter. This
function will help if both transmitters are in
different modes, or the Master has a different
wing type set up. The student can be set
to match the Master without any physical
changes being made.
58 <Functions of System Menu>
*Please do not use REVERSE, END POINT, or any other
mixes at student transmitter.
DISPLAY
LCD and backlight adjustment, unit system
LCD contrast, backlight brightness, and
backlight off timer adjustment are possible.
You can also set your units to either the metric
system or standard.
● Select [DISPLAY] at the system menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
LCD contrast adjustment
1.Select "CONTRAST" and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode and adjust
the contrast by scrolling the Push dial.
"CONTRAST": Adjust the contrast to the
desired value while watching the screen
display.
Setting range: (Lighter) 0 to 15 (Darker)
Initial value: 5
*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, push
the RTN button for one second.
2.Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Backlight brightness adjustment
1.Select "BRIGHTNESS" and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode and adjust
the backlight brightness by scrolling the Push
dial.
"BRIGHTNESS": Adjust the brightness to the
desired value while watching the screen
display.
Setting range: OFF, 1 to 20(Lighter)
Initial value: 10
*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, push
the RTN button for one second.
2.Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Back-light off-timer
1.Select "OFF TIMER" and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode and adjust
the backlight off timer by scrolling the Push
dial.
"OFF TIMER": Adjust the time when the
backlight turns off after operating the Push
dial.
Setting range: 10 to 240 sec (each 10 sec),
OFF (always on)
Initial value: 10 sec
*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, push
the RTN button for one second.
2.Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Unit system adjustment
1.Select "UNIT SYS." and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode and adjust
the unit by scrolling the Push dial.
Setting range: (METRIC) or (YARD/POUND)
2.Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
<Functions of System Menu>
59
USER NAME
User name registration
This function allows the modelers to change the
T12K user name.
*A name of up to 10 characters can be entered as the user
name. Please note that a space is counted as one character.
● Select [USER NAME] at the System menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
User name (candidate)
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Data is entered
RETURN
User name registration
●To next page
(Character list 1/3)
1. Change the user name as described below:
[Moving cursor in user name (candidate)]
Select [←] or [→], and push the RTN button.
[Deleting a character]
When [DELETE] is selected and the RTN
button is pushed, the character immediately
after the cursor is deleted.
[Adding a character]
When a character is selected from the
character list and the RTN button is pushed,
that character is added at the position
immediately after the cursor.
*A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as the
user name. (A space is counted as 1 character.)
2. Upon completing the input, select [ENTER]
and push the RTN button. (To terminate
input and return to the original state, select
[CANCEL] and push the RTN button.)
60 <Functions of System Menu>
(Character list 2/3)
(Character list 3/3)
SOUND
Turns off the buzzer.
The warning sound and other sounds of the
T12K transmitter can be turned off.
*When “WARNING” is set to OFF, the no operation alarm
(30 minutes), mixing warning sound, and low battery alarm
sounds are turned off.
● Select [SOUND] at the system menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
On/off operation
1.Move the cursor to the [TIMER][WARNING]
or [OTHER SOUND] item and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
2.Select ON or OFF by scrolling the Push dial.
*The display blinks.
3.Push the RTN button.
● Telemetry data is announced over headphones.
There are two pages of settings for it.
This is a hardware for phone
volume Vario.
Vario melody volume
This is a operation mode
for the phone volume
Vario Melody.
Phone volume
(Telemetry etc,)
This is a hardware
for phone volume
except Vario.
SOUND 2/2 VARIO MELODY
This is the volume of Vario Melody only.
Setting range:0 (silent) ~ 30 (maximum)
The hardware for the adjustment is selectable.
Setting range:J1,J2,J3,J4,T1,T2,T3,T4,
SA,SB,SC,SD,SE,SF,SG,SH,LS,LD,RD,
RS
The operation mode of the adjustment
hardware is selectable.
This is a operation mode
for the phone volume
except Vario Melody.
ATL+ : When the operation direction is right or down
or C.W. , the volume is increased.
ATL- : When the operation direction is right or down or
C.W. , the volume is decreased.
SYM. : The center position is minimum volume. Both
end points are maximum volume.
ATL+ ATL-
SYM.
<Functions of System Menu>
61
H/W SETTING
Hardware reverse and stick mode
H/W reverse
This function reverses the operation direction of
the sticks, switches, trim levers, and knobs.
Note: This setting reverses the actual operation
signal, but does not change the display
indicators. Use the Normal mode as long as
there is no special reason to use the Reverse
mode.
Note: This will not change the throttle ratchet,
etc. Mechanical changes must be performed
by a Futaba service center.
Note: After changing the mode, these changes
are only applied to new models. It is not
applied to an existing model.
Stick calibration
J1-J4 stick correction can be performed.
Stick mode
This function changes the stick mode of
transmitter.
● Select [H/W SET] at the system menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Access setup screen
RETURN
Operation direction reversal method
Changing stick mode
1.Select [H/W REVERSE] and access the setup
screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
1.Select [STICK MODE] and access the setup
screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
2.Move the cursor to the item corresponding to
the H/W (hardware) you want to reverse and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
3. Select the mode by scrolling the Push dial.
The display blinks. When the RTN button is
pushed, the operation direction is reversed.
(To terminate the mode change, push the S1
button.)
"NORM": Normal operation direction
"REV" : Operation direction is reversed.
62 <Functions of System Menu>
2. Move the cursor to the "STICK MODE" item
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
3. Select the mode. The display blinks. When
the RTN button is pushed, the stick mode is
changed. (To terminate the mode change,
push the S1 button.)
(J3)
(J2)
(J4)
Mode
1
2
3
4
J1
Aileron
Aileron
Rudder
Rudder
J2
Throttle
Elevator
Throttle
Elevator
(J1)
J3
Elevator
Throttle
Elevator
Throttle
J4
Rudder
Rudder
Aileron
Aileron
Stick calibration method
*J3 and J4 correction is described below. J1 and J2
corrections are performed using the same procedure.
1.Select [CALIBRATION] and access the setup
screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
2.Move the cursor to the J3-J4 button and push
the RTN button.
3.Move the J3 or J4 sticks to the neutral position
and push the RTN button for one second.
4.Set the J3 and J4 sticks fully to the bottom
right and wait until the buzzer sounds.
5.Set the J3 and J4 sticks fully to the top left and
wait until the buzzer sounds.
6.The above completes the correction
operation. Operate and check if stick
correction was performed normally.
<Functions of System Menu>
63
START SEL.
Immediately, a model selection can be performed
START SEL can perform a model selection
immediately on startup. This is convenient for
modelers who fly two or more models with a single
transmitter.
Quick Select Screen
As the name suggests, the Quick Model Select
Function enables the modeler to change the
selected models rapidly each time the transmitter is
turned ON. With a few quick pushes, it is possible
to change models whereas before it would require
a multi-step process. The T12K stores up to four
models in the Quick Select offerings.
Model Select Screen
When the transmitter is turned on, it will open to
the Model Selection Screen immediately.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
Setting Up and Adjusting the Quick Select Models activated, there are two additional options available
1.The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu is for customization: ALWAYS and MDL (Model).
accessed through the T12K System Menu. These options determine if/when the Quick Select
Turn the transmitter ON and then push the SYS information will appear on-screen. ALWAYS,
(System) button two times. Use the Push Dial as the name suggests, indicates that each time
to highlight the Start Selection (START SEL.) and the transmitter is powered-up, the Quick Select
then push the Return (RTN) button to confirm
information will appear on-screen. The MDL
the selection.
(Model) setting indicates that the Quick Select
information will appear on-screen only when
the MDL button is pushed simultaneously as the
transmitter is turned ON. With the Quick Select
mode highlighted, use the Push Dial to move to
2.The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu option the activation setting options. Model (MDL) is the
defaults to OFF, meaning that Quick Select default setting. Push the Return (RTN) button to
and Model Select are not applicable. To open the options, then scroll to the ALWAYS setting
activate the Quick Select or Model Select,
using the Push Dial pad. Push the Return (RTN)
use the Push Dial to scroll to the OFF setting
as denoted in the image. With the OFF button once again to finalize the selection.
indication highlighted, push the Return (RTN)
button and rotate the Push Dial once again
to scroll amongst the options. With the Quick
Select (QUICK SEL.) indicated, push the Return
(RTN) button once again to make the desired
selection as indicated.
Quick Select Activation:
With the Quick Select (QUICK SEL.) option
64 <Functions of System Menu>
Model Select Screen
Assigning models to the sensor buttons:
There are four sensors/buttons that correspond with This allows the Model Select screen to be accessed
the Push Dial: Link (LNK), Model (MDL), System immediately upon turning ON the transmitter.
(SYS), and S1. As such, it is possible to offer up *Please note: this function cannot be utilized at the same time
as the Quick Select function. If more than four models are
to four models available through the Quick Select
flown regularly, we suggest that the Model Select function be
function. We suggest using the models that you fly
utilized as it will save time when selecting the desired aircraft.
most often.
If four, or fewer, models are flown, the Quick Select option
would be the best choice.
1.Using the Push Dial, scroll to the desired sensor/
*Please note: the Model Select function does not allow access
button for the first model, for example, Link
to the RENAME, COPY, or DELETE options. To use one of
(LNK).
these options, access the Model Select screen.
2.With the input next to the desired sensor
highlighted, push the Return (RTN) button one
time.
1.The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu is
3.Using the Push Dial, scroll through the available
accessed through the T12K’s System Menu.
models. To select the desired model, push the
Turn the transmitter ON and then push the SYS
Return (RTN) button.
(System) button two times. Use the Push Dial
to highlight the Start Selection (START SEL.) and
4.Repeat as desired for the remaining sensors.
then push the Return (RTN) button to confirm
the selection.
Using the sensors to select the model:
1.Turn ON the transmitter, activating the
Quick Select screen. If Model (MDL) has
been selected, please be sure to push the
Model (MDL) sensor when powering up the
transmitter.
2.The Start Selection (START SEL.) menu option
defaults to OFF meaning that Quick Select
and Model Select are not applicable. To
activate the Quick Select or Model Select,
use the Push Dial to scroll to the OFF setting as
denoted in the image. With the OFF indication
highlighted, push the Return (RTN) button and
rotate the Push Dial once again to scroll to the
Model Select (MODEL SEL.). Push the Return
(RTN) button once again to activate Model
Select as indicated.
*Please note: Even if the Quick Select function is active, the
Power Mode screen will appear when the transmitter is turned
ON while simultaneously pushing the Return (RTN) button.
2. To select the model assigned to a particular
sensor, double-click the desired sensor. For
example, MODEL- 03 is assigned to S1, double- Model Select Activation:
click S1 to open all settings, etc. for Model With the Model Select (MODEL SEL.) option
-03. The T12K offers an audible and visual
activated, there are two additional options available
confirmation as the selected model memory is
for customization: ALWAYS and MDL (Model).
changed accordingly.
*Double clicking the Return (RTN) button selects the model
that was selected the last time the transmitter was used. The
currently selected model is indicated on the display.
These options determine if/when the Model Select
information will appear on-screen. ALWAYS,
as the name suggests, indicates that each time
the transmitter is powered-up, the Model Select
information will appear on-screen. The MDL
(Model) setting indicates that the Model Select
information will appear on-screen only when
the MDL button is pushed simultaneously as the
transmitter is turned ON.
With the Model Select mode highlighted, use the
<Functions of System Menu>
65
Push Dial to move to the activation setting options.
Model (MDL) is the default setting. Push the Return
(RTN) button to open the options, then scroll to the
ALWAYS setting using the Push Dial pad. Push
the Return (RTN) button once again to finalize the
selection.
Using the Model Select Function:
1.Turn ON the transmitter, activating
Model Select screen. If Model (MDL)
been selected, please be sure to push
Model (MDL) sensor when powering up
transmitter.
the
has
the
the
*Please note: Even if the Model Select function is active, the
Power Mode screen will appear when the transmitter is turned
ON while simultaneously pushing the Return (RTN) button.
2.The Push Dial is used to select amongst the
on-screen models. The current model will
automatically be highlighted when the
transmitter is turned ON. If a different model
is desired, use the Push Dial to scroll through
the available options; each highlighted
accordingly. Again, to select a model, push
the Return (RTN) button accordingly. The T12K
offers an audible and visual confirmation as
the selected model memory is changed.
66 <Functions of System Menu>
AUTO LOCK
The automatic lock function of two kinds of Push Dial
The Auto Lock function makes it possible to lock
the transmitter to prevent any unwanted input from
your hands while flying.
The auto lock function can be set in two ways.
LOCK TIMER
Auto Lock functions automatically when there is
no operation from the HOME screen display for a
chosen number of seconds.
● Manual lock
START LOCK
Auto Lock functions automatically when the
model changes or power is turned on.
*To temporarily allow access to the T12K programming push
and hold the S1 or HOME/EXIT bitton for one second.
Please note, the Auto Lock function timer will resume
immediately once again.
If HOME/EXIT button is pushed 1
second or more from a HOME screen,
a Push Dial locks manually.
● Manual lock
If S1 button is pushed 1 second or
more from a HOME screen, a Push
Dial locks manually.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
Auto lock method
1.Open the Auto lock screen in the system
menu.
● Lock release
Every lock function's push [ 1 second
or more ] of S1 button will release the
lock.
● Lock release
Every lock function's push [ 1 second
or more ] of HOME/EXIT button will
release the lock.
2. Adjust the activation timer for the Auto
Lock function. The timer will begin counting
immediately when the HOME screen is not
used. The timer is adjustable in one second
increments, up to 30 seconds. If the timer
value is OFF, this function is not applicable.
● Display of a lock
If locked, there will be sound and the
icon of a key will come out.
3.The Start Lock setting will, if enabled,
automatically lock the T12K when the
transmitter is powered up. To allow access to
the transmitter's functions, push and hold the
S1 key for one second.
Danger
*If neither the Lock Timer or Start Lock functions are active
(OFF), then the key lock remains even if the power is turned off.
*If the Lock Timer is enabled and the Start Lock is off, the key
lock status is canceled each time the T12K is turned on.
It is recommended to Lock the Push
Dial during flight to prevent any
accidental pushes which could change
settings and cause an accident.
<Functions of System Menu>
67
INFO
Displays the program version, micro SD card information, and product ID.
The T12K system program version information,
micro SD card information (current and maximum
number of model data and other files), and product
ID are displayed on the Information screen.
The language displayed in home, menu, and
setup screen is selectable.
*When the micro SD card is not inserted, the micro SD card
information is not displayed.
● Select [INFO] at the system menu and access the
setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
Information
Language selection
"PRODUCT": Product ID number
"RF ID": RF ID number
"LANGUAGE": The language used in T12K
"VERSION": T12K system program version
information
"AREA": Area which can use T12K
"CARD SIZE": Current/Maximum number of
model data and other files (micro SD card)
1.Move the cursor to the "LANGUAGE" item
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
2.Change the language by scrolling the Push
dial. The display blinks. When the RTN button
is pushed, the language is changed. (To
terminate the change, turn the EDIT dial or
push the S1 button.)
*Telemetry speech is in English or Japanese.
*The telemetry speech and the version of installed speech data can be
confirmed on the "TELEM.SET." screen.
*After updates, there is a possibility that a language changes. Readjust a
language in that case.
Language table
Version No.
Ver.1.0
Ver.1.0A
Ver.1.0B
Ver.1.0C
68 <Functions of System Menu>
Choose from these files.
English
English
English
English
Selectable language
Japanese
Dutch
Spanish
Russian
German
French
Czech
Italian
SBUS SERVO
SBUS servo setting.
An S.BUS servo can memorize the channel
and various settings you input. Servo setting
can be performed on the T12K screen by
wiring the servo as shown in the figure.
3-way hub
or
Y-harnesses
T12K
● Select [SOUND] at the system menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
●Select the function name
and return to the System
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
RETURN
Servo ID number
Individual ID numbers are memorized for your
S.BUS(2) servos in your T12K. When a servo is
used, the servo ID number is automatically read by
the transmitter. If you use multiple S.BUS(2) servos
and do not want to change the settings on all that are
mounted in a fuselage, only the desired servo in the
group can be set by entering the ID of that specific
servo.
S.BUS/S.BUS2
Servo
<Push Dial>
Battery
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
* After reading completion, with connection of the above
figure, if a stick is moved, the test of operation of the servo
can be operated and carried out.
* With some S.BUS(2) servos, there are some functions which
cannot be used. If a function cannot be used, the display screen
will change.
(Only the function which can be used by a servo is displayed.)
Procedure for changing S.BUS servo setting
1. Select [SBUS SERVO] of the System Menu.
Push [INIT.], if you would like to initialize a
setup of a servo. ([INIT.] is chosen ⇒ RTN is
2. Wire the servo as shown in the figure above.
pushed ⇒ RTN is pushed for 1 second)
3. Push [RECALL] on page 3(S1 is pushed twice).
The ID and current setting of that servo are
displayed. ([RECALL] is chosen ⇒ RTN is
pushed ⇒ RTN is pushed for 1 second)
4. When multiple servos are connected change
[INH] at the right side of the ID number on the
screen to [ACT] and enter the ID of the servo
you want to set.
5. Set each item. (Please see the next page.)
6. Push [WRITE] on page 3([WRITE] is chosen ⇒ RTN
is pushed ⇒ RTN is pushed for 1 second). The
settings are changed.
<Functions of System Menu>
69
SBD-1 CH setting
CH setting of SBD-1 is available.
The SBD-1 (option) is a converter for using
conventional servos (other than S.BUS servo) with
the S.BUS system.
1. Connect the SBD-1 and the battery to S.I/F
port with 3 ways hub or Y harness.
2. Select S.BUS SERVO menu in SYSTEM menu.
3. Move to page 3/3.
4. Operate RECALL button. (RECALL is chosen.
⇒ RTN is pushed. ⇒ RTN is pushed for 1
second.) SBD-1 setting screen is shown.
WRITE operation is writing
CH settings to SBD-1.
RECALL operation is reading
CH settings from SBD-1.
5. Set CH to each port of SBD-1. (SX1, SX2 and
SX3)
* Setting range : CH1 ~ CH12,DG1,DG2
6. Operate WRITE button. (WRITE is chosen. ⇒
RTN is pushed. ⇒ RTN is pushed for 1 second.)
7. The settings are changed.
8. When the WRITE operation is successful, the
message "COMPLETED" is shown.
9. When the WRITE operation fails, the message
"FAILED" is shown.
70 <Functions of System Menu>
S.BUS Servo Description of function of each parameter
*Certain functions will only be available with specific types of servo.
• ID
Displays the ID of the servo whose parameters are to be read. It cannot be changed.
• Channel
Channel of the S.BUS system assigned to the servo. Always assign a channel before use.
• Reverse
The direction in which the servo rotates can be changed.
• Servo type
■ Normal: Normal operation mode
■ Retract: Retract servo mode. When a load is applied to the servo for 30 seconds without any channel
operation performed from the transmitter, the current consumption is suppressed by widening
the dead band to 40°. When channel operation is performed from the transmitter, or the servo
is moved outside the expanded dead band by an outside force, dead band expansion is reset
and returns to the original operation.
■ O.L.P. : This is the OverLoad Protection mode. If the servo is stalled for more than 5 seconds by a
load, the servo output is turned off to protect the servo.
(Note)The S3171SB, S9071SB, S9072SB, S9074SB and S9075SB cannot utilize the Overload Protection mode.
OLP setting
When the servo type is OLP mode, the torque and time for OLP can be set. When the load is greater
than this setting torque and continues over this setting time, OLP works.
<Trq>
This is the torque for working OLP.
Setting range:10% ~ 100%(100% is the maximum torque of the servo which you are setting.)
<TIME>
This is the time for working OLP.
Setting range:0.2,0.5,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,15,20,25,30 sec
When TYPE is set to OLP at page 2/3,
OLP trq and time is shown at page
3/3.
This is the torque for working OLP.
This is the time for working OLP.
*If the setting of OLP torque and time is decreased, it is easier to engage OLP. Please be careful not to set OLP to operate
under normal running conditions.
• Soft Start
Restricts operation in the specified direction the instant the power is turned on. By using this setting, the
first initial movement when the power is turned on slowly moves the servo to the specified position.
• Stop Mode
The state of the servo when the servo input signal is lost can be specified. The "Hold" mode setting holds
the servo in its last commanded position even if using AM or FM system.
• Smoother
This function changes smoothness of the servo operation relative to stick movement changes. Smooth
setting is used for normal flight. Select the "OFF" mode when quick operation is necessary such as 3D.
• Neutral Offset
The neutral position can be changed. When the neutral offset is large, the servo's range of travel is
restricted on one side.
<Functions of System Menu>
71
• Speed Control
Speeds can be matched by specifying the operating speed. The speed of multiple servos can be matched
without being affected by motor fluctuations. This is effective for load torques below the maximum torque.
However, note that the maximum speed will not exceed what the servo is capable of even if the servos
operating voltage is increased.
• Dead band
The dead band angle at stopping can be specified.
[Relationship between dead band set value and servo operation]
Small → Dead band angle is small and the servo is immediately operated by a small signal change.
Large → Dead band angle is large and the servo does not operate at small signal changes.
(Note) If the dead band angle is too small, the servo will operate continuously the current consumption
will increase, and the life of the servo will be shortened.
• Travel Adjust
The left and right travels centered about the neutral position can be set independently.
• Boost
The minimum current applied to the internal motor when starting the servo can be set. Since a small
travel does not start the motor, it essentially feels like the dead band was expanded. The motor can be
immediately started by adjusting the minimum current which can start the motor.
[Relationship between boost set value and servo operation]
Small → Motor reacts to a minute current and operation becomes smooth.
Large → Initial response improves and output torque increases. However, if the torque is too large,
operation will become rough.
• Boost ON/OFF
OFF : Boost activates only when operating at low speed.
ON : Boost is always on to increase operating speed.
• Damper
The characteristic when the servo is stopped can be set.
When smaller than the standard value, the characteristic becomes an overshoot characteristic. If the value
is larger than the standard value, the brake is applied before the stop position.
When large loads are applied, servos may be pushed by inertia and hunting may occur. If "hunting" (servo
oscillation) occurs, even though the Dead Band, Stretcher, Boost, and other parameters are suitable,
adjust the damper value up.
[Relationship between damper set value and servo operation]
Small → When you want to overshoot. Set so that hunting does not occur.
Large → When you want to operate so that braking is not applied. However, it will feel like the servo
response has worsened.
(Note) If used in the hunting state, not only will the current consumption increase, but the life of the servo
will also be shortened.
• Stretcher
The servo hold characteristic can be set. The torque which attempts to return the servo to the target
position when the current servo position has deviated from the target position can be adjusted.
This is used when stopping hunting, etc., but the holding characteristic changes as shown below.
[Relationship between stretcher and servo operation]
Small → Servo holding force becomes weaker.
Large → Servo holding force becomes stronger.
72 <Functions of System Menu>
(Note) When this parameter is large, the current consumption increases.
• Buzzer
When a servo power is turned on before a transmitter is connected, a buzzer sounds at 2.5Hz from the
servo.
(It is not unusual for a servo buzzer to continue, even if a transmitter is disconnected, if the signal from the
servo is not normal. )
If the transmitter is turned off before the servo power supply a buzzer sounds at 1.25Hz for the servo
power supply end failure alarm.
(Do not insert or remove the servo connector while the receiver power is ON. A buzzer may
sound by incorrect recognition.)
* Buzzer sound is generated by vibrating the motor of a servo.
Sounding a buzzer consumes current and produces heat. Do not operate the unit or allow a buzzer to
sound for a long time.
<Functions of System Menu>
73
FUNCTIONS OF LINKAGE MENU
The Linkage Menu is made up of functions
which perform model addition, model type
selection, system type, end point setting, and other
model basic settings.
The functions which can be selected depend on
the model type. A typical menu screen is shown
below.
● Call the Linkage menu shown below by long
pushing the LNK button at the home screen,
etc.
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Calling setup screen
RETURN
*The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.
● Select the function you want to set and call
the setup screen by pushing the RTN button.
Linkage Menu functions table
[SERVO]: Displays the servo test and operation position.
[MODEL SEL]: Model addition, call, deletion, copy, model name setting.
[MODEL TYPE]: Model type, wing type, swash type, etc. selection.
[SYSTEM]: System mode selection, link of a transmitter and receiver, area mode selection.
[FUNCTION]: Channel assignment of each function can be changed.
[SUB-TRIM]: Adjusts the neutral position of each servo.
[REVERSE]: Reverses the servo travel direction.
[FAIL SAFE]: Fail safe function and battery fail safe function setting.
[END POINT]: Servo travel adjustment and limit setting.
[SERVO SPEED]: Speed setup of a servo.
[THR CUT]: Stops the engine safely and easily (airplane and helicopter only).
[IDLE DOWN]: Lowers the idle speed of the engine (airplane only).
[SWASH RING]: Limits the swash plate travel to within a fixed range. (helicopter only).
[SWASH]: Swash AFR and linkage correction function (helicopter only).
[T1-T4 SET.]: Control step amount and mode selection of the digital trim.
[STK ALARM]: An alarm can be sounded at the specified stick position.
[WARNING]: Mixing warning normal reset.
[TELEM.SET.]: Telemetry speech Ver./Telemetry data log /Telemetry alarm duration and repeat time.
[TELEMETRY]: Displays various data sent from the receiver.
[SENSOR]: Various telemetry sensors setting.
[DATA RESET]: Model memory set data reset.
74 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
SERVO MONITOR
Servo Test & Graph Display / Displays servo positions.
This is used for testing servo movement.
“Moving Test” (repetition mode) and “Neutral
Test” (fixed position mode) are available.
The “Neutral Test” is good for finding the
neutral position of a servo horn.
In order to prevent any potential difficulties,
the servo test function will be inoperable, or
inaccessible, under certain conditions. Specifically,
the Servo Test function is not operational if the
throttle cut is ON in either airplane or helicopter
modes; or if the throttle hold is ON in helicopter
mode.
● A [U.MENU/MON.] button is pushed once from a
home screen.
● Select [SERVO] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
Servo test operation
1. Move the cursor to the [OFF] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the test mode by scrolling the Push
dial and push the RTN button. The display
blinks. Push the RTN button to change the
mode. (To terminate mode change, push
the S1 button.)
[MOVING]: Mode which repeats operation of
each servo
[NEUTRAL]: Mode which locks each servo in
the neutral position
2. Move the cursor to the [MOVING] or
[NEUTRAL] item and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Select the [OFF] by scrolling the Push dial and
push the RTN button. Testing is stopped.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
75
MODEL SELECT
The Model Selection function performs model addition, selection,
deletion, copy, and model name setting.
This function is used to load the settings of the
desired model into the T12K’s memory.
The settings may be selected from either the
transmitter’s internal memory or a micro SD card.
Remember that up to 30 model memories are available
in the transmitter.
The name of the model stored in the transmitter
and the micro SD card may be changed. This can be
very useful to tell different models settings apart. Each
model name can be as long as 10 characters, and the
model name always appears in the display screen.
The Copy function is used to copy parameters,
settings, etc. from one model data into a second
memory. It may be used for getting a head-start on
setting up models with almost the same settings (only
differences need to be modified, instead of entering the
complete model from scratch). Also, this function may
be used to make a backup copy of a model setup before
any changes are made.
● Select [MODEL SELECT] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
Current model
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
(Model list)
Model selection
*The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.
Model addition
*Model data saved on the transmitter memory other than the
model currently used can be selected.
*A new model can be added to the transmitter memory. It
cannot be added to the micro SD card.
1. Move the cursor to the save destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling the
Push dial and push the RTN button.
[TX]: Transmitter memory
[CARD]: micro SD card
2. After moving the cursor to the desired model
in the model list, push the RTN button.
3. Move to [SELECT].
4.Push the RTN button. A confirmation message
is displayed. Push the RTN button for one
second and selection is complete.
1. Move the cursor to [NEW].
2.Push the RTN button. A confirmation message
appears. Push the RTN button for one
second.
*The model type setup screen and frequency setup screen are
automatically displayed. Confirm or change the model type
and SYSTEM mode.
*Transmission stops and then starts in the new model.
*The added model appears in the model list of the model
select setup screen.
*Link is required when a new model is
made from a model selection.
*Transmission stops and then starts in the new model.
76 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
Model deletion
*The model stored in the transmitter memory or a micro SD
card can be deleted.
*The current model cannot be deleted.
1. Move the cursor to the save destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling the
Push dial and push the RTN button.
[TX]: Transmitter memory
[CARD]: micro SD card
2. Move the cursor to the model you want to
delete in the model list and then push the
RTN button.
3. Move the cursor to [DELETE].
4. Push the RTN button. When a confirmation
message is displayed and the RTN button
is pushed for one second, the model is
deleted.
Model name change
*The model name of the model stored in the transmitter
memory or a micro SD card can be changed.
1. If changing the location:
Move the cursor to the save destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling the
Push dial and push the RTN button.
[TX]: Transmitter memory
[CARD]: micro SD card
2. Move the cursor to the model you want to
change in the model list and then push the
RTN button.
3. Move to [RENAME].
4. Push the RTN button.
*The model name setup screen is displayed.
User name (candidate)
5. Change the model name as described
below:
[Moving cursor in the user name (candidate)]
Select [←] or [→], and push the RTN button.
[Deleting a character]
When [DELETE] is selected and the RTN
button is pushed, the character immediately
after the cursor is deleted.
[Adding a character]
When a character is selected from the
character list and the RTN button is pushed,
that character is added at the position
immediately after the cursor.
*A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as the
model name. (A space is also counted as one character.)
6. After the desired information has been input,
select [ENTER] and push the RTN button. (To
terminate input and return to the original
state, select [CANCEL] and push the RTN
button.)
Model copy
*A copy can be made of the model stored in the transmitter
memory or a micro SD card.
1. If changing the location:
Move the cursor to the save destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling the
Push dial and push the RTN button.
[TX]: Transmitter memory
[CARD]: micro SD card
2.Select the model you want to copy in the
model list and then push the RTN button.
3. Move to [COPY].
4. Push the RTN button.
*The copy screen appears.
5.I f r e p l a c i n g t h e m o d e l s t o r e d i n t h e
transmitter memory:
Move to [ADD-LIST] and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Select the destination model by scrolling the
Push dial and push the RTN button.
[ADD-LIST]: adding the model to the list
[(model name)]: replacing the model
*The model stored in the micro SD card can be replaced.
If changing the location:
Move the cursor to the copy destination
display ("TX" or "CARD") and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the save destination by scrolling the
Push dial and push the RTN button.
6. Move to [COPY].
7. Push the RTN button. When a confirmation
message is displayed and the RTN button is
pushed for one second, the model data is
copied.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
77
MODEL TYPE
This function selects the model type from among multirotor, airplane,
helicopter, and glider.
Six swash types are available for helicopters.
Six types of main wings and three types of tail
wings are available for airplanes and gliders.
Functions and mixing functions necessary for each
model type are set in advance at the factory.
Note: The Model Type function automatically
selects the appropriate output channels,
control functions, and mixing functions for the
chosen model type.
When the Model Type selection command
is accessed, all of the data in the active
memory is cleared (except the following
swash type.) Be sure that you don’t mind
losing this data, or back it up to another
memory using the copying functions.
When changing the helicopter swash type
within the following groups, you can leave
the settings other than the SWASH function.
However, this is initialized when you change
the swash type to the other swash type
group.
Swash type group A:
H-1, H-3, HR3, and HE3
Swash type group B:
H-4, H-4X
● Select [MODEL TYPE] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
RETURN
Model type selection
1. Move the cursor to the item you want to
change and push the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode.
Select the desired type by scrolling the Push
dial and push the RTN button. A confirmation
message appears. Push the RTN button for
one second.
Move to [YES] and Push the RTN button for
one second.
(To terminate input and return to the original
state, push the S1 button or select [NO] and
push the RTN button.)
"TYPE": Model type
"WING " (airplane/glider): Wing type
"TAIL" (airplane/glider): Tail type
"SWASH" (helicopter): Swash type
*The wing types which can be selected depend on the mode;
T-FHSS Air or S-FHSS.
78 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
2. If resetting the data when changing the
helicopter swash type:
(Helicopter)
Move the cursor to [OFF] and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select [ON] by scrolling the Push dial and
push the RTN button. A confirmation message
appears. Push the RTN button.
Activate the swash type setting. The swash
setting parameters are reset.
Model type selection (Airplane, Glider)
●Wing type (Normal)
●Wing type (Tailless wing)
●Rudder type
●Tail type
Model type selection (Helicopter)
●Swash type
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
79
SYSTEM
System mode setting, Receiver link
System Type selection
Receiver linking
The T12K is for 2.4GHz only. The system can
be changed from among 2 choices: T-FHSS Air
(12CH+ON/OFF-2CH) and S-FHSS (8CH).
The receiver will only be controlled (without
being affected by other transmitters) by the
transmitter it is linked to. When using a receiver
other than one purchased as a set, linking is
necessary.
Moreover, a re-link is required when a new
model is added by model selection, and the time of
system type change.
*If you change the System Type, other model data is not
reset.
*If a system type is changed in helicopter mode, the
transmitter will offer two selections:
[Yes] : Selection sets the channel order suitable for System
Type. (We recommend here. )
[No] : The present channel order is maintained.
*After any change, remember to test the model and should
fully check servo direction and a motion.
● Select [SYSTEM] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the
RTN button.
● In the case of T-FHSS, the
ID of the linked receiver
is displayed.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
Battery fail-safe voltage setup (only T-FHSS Air )
System Type selection procedure
The voltage which battery fail-safe activates,
can be set when you link. (3.5-8.4V) The receiver
memorizes the setting as it was at link.
Suggested setting voltages are as follows.
• 4 cells NiCd or NiMH (Normal: 4.8v) = 3.8 v
• 2 cells LiFe (Normal: 6.6 v) = 6.0 ~ 6.2 v
• 2 cells LiPo (Normal: 7.4 v) = 7.2 ~ 7.4 v
It is a rough reference value.
Since it changes with servos carried in the
condition and the model of a battery, please set to
your own model in a battery consumption current.
1.Move the cursor to the [T-FHSS] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Cases when linking is necessary:
・When using a receiver other than the initial setting.
・When the communication system was changed.
(T-FHSS Air ↔ S-FHSS)
・When a new model was created by model
selection.
Linking method
P.42
Telemetry function (T-FHSS Air mode only)
To use the telemetry function, set “Telemetry”
to “ACT”.
80 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
2.Select the system type by scrolling the Push
dial.
[T-FHSS] or [S-FHSS]
3.Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
System
T-FHSS Air
Receiver
(2017,11)
R3006SB
R3008SB
R3001SB
CH
12CH+ON/OFF 2CH
Telemetry
Possible
*The surface system
receivers receiver
cannot be used.
S-FHSS
8CH
Impossible
R2006GS
R2106GF
R2008SB
R2001SB
FUNCTION
Channel assignment of each function can be changed.
When you select model and wing (swash) types,
you will find that the optimized combinations of
servo output channels and functions have been
already preset. If you would like, you can freely
change combinations of servo output channels,
functions (aileron, elevator, etc), and control (sticks,
switches, and trim levers).
*You can also assign the same function to multiple servo
output channels such as assigning elevator function to CH2
and CH3.
Channel Replacement
When the channel is replaced in the Function
menu, replaced channel uses the setting data (ATV,
SUB-TRIM, REVERSE, F/S, and B-F/S, etc.).
Servo Output Channels
*DG1/2 (digital channels)
These channels can function as switched channels. You can
freely change combinations between servo output channels
and input controls (sticks, switches, and trim levers).
Motor Function
If you have either a Glider or Airplane Model
Type selected and choose to activate the Motor
function, a reverse setting screen is displayed.
*If YES is selected, the output is reversed. If NO is selected,
the output is normal.
Warning
To p r e v e n t t h e m o t o r f r o m s t a r t i n g
unexpectedly, switch off the motor. We also
suggest removing the propeller from the
motor as an additional precaution.
For T-FHSS Air mode, you can set 12 linear
channels and two digital channels. For S-FHSS
mode, you can set only 8 linear channels.
● Select [FUNCTION] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
● Trim operation mode
"COMB": Combination mode
"SEPAR": Separate mode
It sets up by T1-T4 SET of LINKAGE MENU.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
RETURN
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
Function change
Operation control change
1. Move the cursor to the function item of the
channel you want to change and push the
RTN button.
1. Move the cursor to the "CTRL" item of the
channel you want to change and push the
RTN button.
*The function selection screen is displayed.
*The control selection screen is displayed.
2. Move the cursor to the function name you
want to set and push the RTN button.
*The function name blinks.
3. Push the RTN button to execute the change.
(When you want to cancel this operation,
push the S1 button.)
*Multiple channels can be assigned to one function.
2. Move the cursor to the control you want to
change, and push the RTN button.
*The same control can be assigned to multiple channels.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
81
Camber/Motor/Butterfly control setting (glider)
*Camber/motor/butterfly function control can be changed for
each condition.
Camber, motor or butterfly control group/
single setting is performed at the function
setup screen. "G": Group (common to all conditions)
"S": Single (set for each condition)
Trim setting
Move the cursor to the "TRIM" item of the
channel you want to change and push the
RTN button.
*The trim setup screen is displayed.
The following items can be set at the trim
setup screen:
the RTN button to change the mode. (To
terminate input and return to the original
state, push the S1 button.)
[NORM]: Normal mode. Normal trim (parallel
shift trim) operation.
[ATL]: ATL operation mode. Maximum
change near idle or low-stick position, normally used with throttle trim. It is also
possible to reverse the travel.
*[NORMAL]/[REVERSE] selection is possible in "ATL"
mode.
Throttle trim (helicopter only)
*The throttle trim in conditions other than "normal" condition
can be inhibited.
When other than normal condition is
selected, move the cursor to throttle trim on
the function setup screen and push the RTN
button for 1 second.
*When "X" is displayed, THR trim is inhibited in conditions
other than normal condition.
Trim selection
Channel replacement
Move the cursor to the trim, lever, etc. you
want to set and push the RTN button.
Move the cursor to the channel # you want
to replace and push the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode.
Select the destination channel # by scrolling
the Push dial. A confirmation message
appears. Push the RTN button to replace the
channel. (To terminate input and return to
the original state, push the S1 button.)
*The setting can be changed.
Trim rate setting
Move the cursor to the [RATE] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Set the trim rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: +30%
Adjustment range : -150~+150%
(When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the trim rate
is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Trim mode selection
Move the cursor to the [MODE] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the trim mode by scrolling the Push
dial. A confirmation message appears. Push
82 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
SUB-TRIM
Setting of neutral position of each servo.
The Sub-Trim function is used to set the servo
neutral position, and may be used to make fine
adjustments to the control surface after linkages
and pushrods are hooked up. When you begin to set
up a model, be sure that the digital trims are set to
their center position.
● Select [SUB-TRIM] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
RETURN
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
Sub-trim adjustment
1. Move the cursor to the channel you want to
adjust and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
2. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: -240~+240 (steps)
(When the RTN button is pushed for one second, sub-trim is
reset to the initial value.)
*Before sub-trim adjustment, it is very important to adjust the
linkages at the control surface so that you do not use subtrim, except for very minute adjustments.
3.Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
4. Repeat this procedure for each channel.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
83
REVERSE
Use to reverse the throw direction.
Servo Reverse changes the direction of an
individual servo’s response to a control input.
For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read the
section on Swash AFR before reversing any servos.
With CCPM helicopters, always complete your
servo reversing prior to any other programming.
If you use pre-built Airplane/Sailplane functions
that control multiple servos, it may be confusing
to tell whether the servo needs to be reversed or a
setting in the function needs to be reversed. See the
instructions for each specialized function for further
details. Always check servo direction prior to every
flight as an additional precaution to confirm proper
model memory, hook ups, and radio function.
● Select [REVERSE] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
Servo reversing procedure
*Upon setup completion of a new model, check whether or
not each servo is connected to the correct channel.
*Next, determine whether you need to reverse any channels
by moving each stick and/or other control inputs.
1. Move the cursor to the channel you want to
reverse and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
2.Select the direction by scrolling the Push dial.
A confirmation message appears.
[NORM]: Normal
[REV]: Reverse
3.Push the RTN button to change the direction.
(To terminate input and return to the original
state, push the S1 button.)
*Repeat the operation above for each channel that must be
reversed.
84 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
Danger
Before a flight, always check that your
model's servo operation, the direction
of control surfaces, and switch setup are
correct.
Default setting of the throttle/motor channel
is always reverse.
FAIL SAFE
Sets the servos operating position when transmitter signals can no
longer be received or when the receiver battery voltage drops.
The Failsafe function may be used to set up
positions that the servos move to in the case of
radio interference.
You may set either of two positions for each
channel: Hold, where the servo maintains its last
commanded position, or failsafe, where each
servo moves to a predetermined position. You may
choose either mode for each channel.
The T12K system also provides you with an
advanced battery monitoring function that warns
you when the receiver battery has only a little
power remaining. In this case, each servo is
moved to the defined failsafe position. The battery
failsafe may be released by operating a predefined
control on the transmitter (default is throttle),
do not continue to fly, land as soon as possible.
Remember, if the predefined control suddenly
moves to a position you did not command, land at
once and check your receiver battery.
Defines servo position when signals are lost and
when receiver battery voltage becomes low.
Warning
For safety, always set the fail safe functions.
●Remember to set the throttle channel fail safe function so that
the servo moves to the maximum slow side for airplanes and
to the slow side from the hovering position for helicopters.
Crashing of the model at full high when normal radio waves
cannot be received due to interference, etc., is very dangerous.
●If the battery fail safe is reset by the throttle stick, it may
be mistaken for an engine malfunction and will be reset at
throttle slow and the model will continue to fly. If you have
any doubts, immediately land.
● Select [FAIL SAFE] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
Fail safe setting procedure
Battery fail safe setting procedure
1. Move the cursor to the "F/S" item of the
channel you want to set and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
2.Select the F/S mode by scrolling the Push
dial. A confirmation message appears.
Battery fail safe can be set for each channel
by the same method as the fail safe setting
procedure. Select and set the "B.F/S" item.
[ON]: Battery fail safe function ON
[OFF]: Battery fail safe function OFF
*The display blinks.
3. Push the RTN button. (Push the S1 button to
stop setting.)
*The channel switches to the F/S mode.
4. Move the cursor to the "POS" item.
Hold the corresponding stick, knob, slider,
etc. in the position you want the servo
to move to when the fail safe function is
activated and push the RTN button for one
second.
*The set position is displayed in percentage.
*If you want to return that channel to the hold mode, move
the cursor to the "F/S" item and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode. Select the F/S mode by
scrolling the Push dial. A confirmation message appears and
then change the mode by pushing the RTN button.
Battery fail safe release switch setting
This function temporarily releases the battery
fail safe function so the fuselage can recover
after the battery fail safe function was
activated by a drop in the receiver battery
voltage. This setting selects the switch which
releases the battery fail safe function.
1. Move the cursor to the [RELEASE B.F/S] item in
the setup screen (last page).
2. Push the RTN button.
*The switch selection screen is called.
*For a detailed description of the switch selection and ON/
OFF direction setting method, see [Switch Setting Method]
at the back of this manual.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
85
END POINT
Sets the travel and limit point of each servo.
The End Point function adjusts the left and right
servo throws, generates differential throws, and
will correct improper linkage settings.
The travel rate can be varied from 0% to 140%
in each direction on channels 1 to 12 (T-FHSS Air).
Also, the limit point where servo throw stops may
be varied from 0% to 155%.
● Select [END POINT] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
(limit point)
(limit point)
(travel)
Servo travel adjustment
1. Move the cursor to the travel icon of the
channel you want to adjust and push the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 100%
Adjustment range: 0%~140%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
3. Repeat this procedure for each rate.
Limit point adjustment
1. Move the cursor to the limit point icon of the
channel you want to adjust and push the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2. Adjust the limit point by scrolling the Push
dial.
Initial value: 135%
Adjustment range: 0%~155%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the limit
point is reset to the initial value.
Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
3. Repeat this procedure for each limit point.
86 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
(travel)
SERVO SPEED
Sets the speed of each servo.
The speed of the servo from 1CH to 12CH
operation can be set up.
It can adjust from 0 to 27.
The initial speed value is "0". Servo speed will
slow as this value is increased to represent the
highest servo speed.
* You cannot use this method to change servo speed at the
same time you use the speed control of an S.BUS servo
setup. This will cause some overlap. Please only use one
method or the other.
* The speed of THR is not set up simultaneously with THR
DELAY (model menu : only airplane).
* Speed cannot be faster than the maximum rate of the servo
to be used.
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
● Select [SERVO SPEED] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
(channel)
(speed)
(speed)
(channel)
Servo speed setting
1. Push the Speed button of the channel you
want to set.
2. Use the adjustment buttons to adjust the
servo speed.
●Initial value: 0
●Adjustment range: 0~27 (steps)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
3. Repeat this procedure for each channel.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
87
THR CUT
Stops the engine safely and easily (airplane and helicopter only)
Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the
engine. Generally speaking, modelers will do so
by flipping a switch with the throttle stick at idle.
The action is not functional at high throttle to
avoid accidental dead stick landings. The switch’s
location and direction must be chosen, as it defaults
to NULL.
Individually adjust the throttle cut activation
setting for each condition. (helicopter)
*Since conditions are not offered when an airplane is selected,
the throttle cut options will vary from the options noted
below.
*The throttle cut POS and SW settings are utilized for all
conditions.
*If the throttle cut switch is activated, or on, this status will
continue even if the condition is changed to an inhibited
setting.
*If the condition is inhibited (INH) the throttle cut is off if the
SW is in the off position and the throttle stick is low.
● Select [THR CUT] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
● Current throttle position
Throttle cut setting procedure
1. Activate the function:
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
● Cut position
*With the selected cut switch ON and the throttle stick at idle;
adjust the rate until the engine consistently cuts off.
However, be sure that the throttle linkage is not pulled too
tight or unreasonable force is not applied to the servo.
● Individually adjust the Throttle Cut activation
setting for each condition. (helicopter)
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Switch selection:
Move the cursor to the [SW] item and access
the switch setup screen by pushing the
RTN button and select the switch and ON
direction.
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
3. Throttle cut position setting:
Move the cursor to the [POS] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the servo operation position at throttle
cut operation by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 17%
Adjustment range: 0%~50%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
88 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
● Throttle
cut status
Designating a throttle cut setting position.
(helicopter)
*A throttle cut function acts in the low side of the throttle
position.
*"THRO" setting is common with all condition.
Warning
Normal setting is slightly above idle.
1. To add the throttle cut position, use the
cursor to select the THRO percentage
desired. Then, push and hold the RTN button
for one second.
● Throttle
cut status
● Throttle
stick position
IDLE DOWN
Lowers the engine idling speed (airplane only)
The Idle Down function lowers the engine to
its idle position. Like throttle cut, this is usually
accomplished by flipping a switch with the throttle
stick at idle. The action is not functional at high
throttle to avoid accidental dead sticks. The
switch’s location and direction must be chosen, as
it defaults to NULL.
● Select [IDLE DOWN] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
● Current throttle position
Idle down setting procedure
1. Activate the function:
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
*When a minus rate is input, an offset is applied at the high
side.
*Maximum offset amount is near maximum slow.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the offset
rate is reset to the initial value.
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Switch selection:
Move the cursor to the [SW] item and access
the switch setup screen by pushing the RTN
button. Select the switch and ON direction.
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
3. Offset rate setting:
Move the cursor to the [OFFSET] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the servo offset rate at idle down
operation by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100%~0%~+100%
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
89
SWASH RING
Limits the swash plate travel to within a fixed range. (Helicopter only)
This function limits the swash travel to a fixed
range in order to prevent damaging the swash
linkage by simultaneous operation of the ailerons
and elevators. It is very useful in 3D aerobatics
which use a large travel.
● Select [SWASH RING] in the Linkage
menu and access the setup screen
shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
● When the swash ring function is activated,
a circle is displayed in the operating
range display area and the rate input box
is displayed. Stick operation is limited to
the area of this circle.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
● The operating range display area:
The vertical direction shows the
elevator travel. The horizontal
direction shows the aileron travel.
Swash ring setting procedure
1. Activate the function:
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Rate setting:
Move the cursor to the [RATE] item. Push the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
Set the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 100%.
Adjustment range: 50 to 200%.
*Adjust the rate to maximum swash tilt.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
90 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
● The marker shows the
stick position.
SWASH
Swash AFR and linkage correction function (helicopter only, except
swash type H-1)
Neutral Point
At your linkages, if the servo horn deviates from
a perpendicular position at neutral, the linkage
compensation functions in this menu may not
compensate effectively. To correct this use the
Neutral Point function. This will move the neutral
point of the servos to the actual perpendicular
position. However, this adjustment changes only
the axis point of the compensation functions in this
menu, and does not affect the neutral position of
other functions.
Swash AFR
Swash AFR function reduces, increases, or
reverses the rate (travel) of the aileron, elevator and
collective pitch functions, by adjusting or reversing
the motion of all servos involved in that function,
only when using that function.
Mixing Rate
This mixing is used to compensate the
swashplate as necessary during specific control
inputs. The following compensation mixing is
possible: PIT to AIL, PIT to ELE, AIL to PIT, ELE
to AIL, and ELE to PIT (HR3 mode.) It adjusts the
swashplate for proper operation of each control
using the corresponding compensation mixing.
Linkage Compensation
This compensation mixing is used to correct the
swashplate for pitch control at low pitch and high
pitch.
Speed Compensation
This function is used to cancel the reaction that
is generated by the difference in the movements of
each servo when the swashplate moves.
Subtrim
Subtrim for aileron, elevator and pitch can be set
during swash setting.
Pitch adjustment function
High, neutral and low pitch fixed outputs can be
used while adjusting the pitch.
● Select [SWASH] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
Neutral point setting procedure
Swash AFR setting procedure
The neutral point becomes the correction
standard point.
The swash AFR function makes adjustments so
that the servos travel the specified amount by [AIL],
[ELE], and [PIT] operation.
*Adjusting the servo horn so that the neutral point is near the
50% position makes the mixing amount small.
1. Neutral point setting
Move the cursor to the [POS] item and hold
the pitch operation so that the servo horn
is at a right angle to the linkage rod. Push
the RTN button for one second. This value
indicates the servo's neutral position.
After reading the neutral point, use the
other correction functions to make further
adjustments.
1.Move the cursor to the function you want to
adjust and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
2. Adjust the AFR rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: +50%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the AFR
rate is reset to the initial value.
Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
91
Mixing rate setting procedure
The HR3 swashplate type will be used as an
example to describe mixing rate setting. The
mixing used in other swash modes may be different.
However, the setting procedure is the same.
*Set the throttle stick to the preset neutral point. Adjust the
length of the linkage rod so that the swash plate is horizontal
at this position.
*The sub-trim function can be used to make small
adjustments.
*When making the following setting, move the cursor to the
item you want to set and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode. Push the RTN button to end adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
1.Compensating aileron input [AIL]
Set the throttle to the lowest position. Move
the aileron stick to the left and right and
adjust the aileron compensation amount
so that interference in the elevator or pitch
direction is minimal.
*Adjust so that the pitch curve is a straight line and the
helicopter achieves maximum pitch.
*Adjust by scrolling the Push dial.
*Move the cursor to the item you want to adjust and push the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode. Push the RTN
button to end adjustment and return to the cursor mode.
*If the interference increases when the compensation amount
was increased, make adjustments with the direction [DIR.]
using the plus "+" or minus "-".
1. Adjusting the aileron operation [AIL to PIT]
Adjust the AIL to PIT rate so there is no binding in the elevator or pitch movement when the
aileron stick is moved to the left and right.
*Adjust by scrolling the Push dial.
*The left and right sides can be adjusted individually.
2. Adjusting the elevator operation [ELE to AIL]/
[ELE to PIT]
Adjust the ELE to AIL and ELE to PIT rates so
there is no binding in the aileron or pitch
movement when the elevator stick is moved
up and down.
*Adjust by scrolling the Push dial.
*The up and down sides can be adjusted individually.
3. Adjusting the pitch operation [PIT to AIL][PIT
to ELE]
Adjust the PIT to AIL and PIT to ELE rates so
that the swash plate moves to the level/
horizontal position when the throttle stick was
moved to maximum low and full high.
*Adjust by scrolling the Push dial.
*The low and high sides can be adjusted individually.
Linkage compensation setting procedure
*Prior to utilizing the linkage compensation settings, it is
important to adjust the mixing rate settings.
*Linkage compensation overrides interference from the
aileron operation with the elevator or elevator operation
with the aileron at collective pitch control for low pitch and
high pitch.
92 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
*The left and right sides can be adjusted individually.
2. Compensating elevator input [ELE]
Adjust the elevator compensation amount
so that the aileron or pitch direction
interference when the elevator stick was
moved up and down is minimal.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above. Perform aileron
and elevator compensation similarly at full
throttle.
Speed compensation setting procedure
1.Move the cursor to the "SPEED" item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2.Set the throttle stick to the neutral point
position. Quickly move the elevator stick and
adjust the speed compensation amount
[SPEED] for minimum interference in the pitch
direction.
*Adjust by scrolling the Push dial.
Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Subtrim setting procedure
Subtrim can be set on the last page of the swash
setting screen.
*The sub-trim value set here is reflected at sub-trim of the
linkage menu.
Pitch adjustment procedure
The pitch adjustment function can be used on the
last page of the swash setting screen.
1.Call the last page of the swash setting
screen.
2.W h e n t h e c u r s o r i s m o v e d t o a p i t c h
adjustment button and the RTN button is
pushed, the corresponding pitch is output.
* In the pitch adjustment mode an * is displayed at the left
side of the current output setting button.
*If the cursor is moved to another button and the RTN button
is pushed during pitch adjustment, the pitch adjustment
mode is deactivated.
Function details are as follows:
Button
High
Neutral
Low
Moving
Function
High pitch fixed output mode
Neutral pitch fixed output mode
Low pitch fixed output mode
Cyclic pitch output mode
*The cyclic pitch speed can be set with the button at the right
side of the “Moving” button.
Setting range: 1 to 100
*When the set value is large, motion becomes fast and when
the set value is small, motion becomes slow.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
93
T1-T4 SET.
Digital trim settings
This function adjusts the digital trim's step
amount and operation mode (T1~T4.)
When the flight conditions are set, the trim
operation can be coupled with the conditions when
combination mode is selected.
The T12K unit of trim is displayed on the home
screen.
Only the trim displayed on the home screen can
be moved to the center position without changing
the actual trim's memory position.
● Select [T1-T4 SET.] in the Linkage menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
● Trim operation mode
"COMB.": Combination mode
"SEPAR": Separate mode
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
(The display screen is an example. The
screen depends on the model type.)
Control step amount setting
Display unit selection
1.Move the cursor to the [STEP] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2.Set the control step amount by scrolling the
Push dial.
Initial value: 4
Adjustment range: 0~200
1.Move the cursor to the [UNIT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2.Select the mode by scrolling the Push dial. A
confirmation message appears.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the control
step amount is reset to the initial value.
*When the value is increased, the change per step becomes
larger.
3.Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Separate/combination mode selection (Heli and
Glider only)
1.Move the cursor to the [MODE] item and push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2.Select the mode by scrolling the Push dial. A
confirmation message appears.
*The display blinks.
[COMB.]: Combination mode. The trim's data
is reflected in all flight conditions.
[SEPAR]: Separate mode. Trim adjustments
are made individually for each flight
condition.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
94 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
*The display blinks.
[--]: A step number is displayed on the home
screen. There is no unit display.
[ %]: "%" is displayed as a unit.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
Trim Memory Operation procedure
1.Move the cursor to the [T1-T4 MEMORY] item
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial. A confirmation message appears.
*The display blinks.
[INH]: Inhibited
[ACT]: Activated
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.At the home screen, move the cursor to the
trim you want to change and push the RTN
for one second. The trim display is moved to
the center position.
*When the function is inhibited, the trim position returns to
the actual trim position.
STK ALARM
Stick alarm
An alarm (single beep) can be sounded at the
specified stick position.
●Alarm function ON/OFF can be set by switch.
100%
J4 0%
100%
100%
J1 0%
0%
J3
● Select [STK ALARM] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
100%
0%
J2
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
Stick alarm setting procedure
1. Activate the function:
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode.
2. Switch selection:
Move the cursor to the [SW] item and access
the switch setup screen by pushing the
RTN button and select the switch and ON
direction.
3. Stick selection:
Move the cursor to the [STK] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
Select the stick by scrolling the Push dial.
4. Alarm position setting:
Move the cursor to the [POS] item.
Adjust the position by select stick.
Push the RTN button.
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
95
WARNING
Low battery alarm voltage set warning normal reset
The T12K includes an audible alarm that sounds
when the transmitter’s battery voltage drops below
a pre-determined setting; adjustable for cell types
and voltages.
Mixing warning at power ON can be reset to
OFF.
Warning display:
Airplane: Throttle cut/Idle down/Throttle
position/Snap-roll/Motor position/Airbrake/
Motor
Helicopter: Condition/Throttle cut/Throttle
position/Throttle Hold
Glider: Condition/Motor position/Trim-mix/Motor
● Select [WARNING] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● Push S1 button to advance to next page.
Accessing and Activating the Low Battery
Alarm
1.The low battery (LOW BATTERY) alarm voltage
is accessed through the T12K’s System Menu. Within the System Menu, use the Push Dial to
highlight the sound option and then push the
return (RTN) button to confirm the selection.
2.Use the Push Dial to scroll to the low battery
(LOW BATTERY) alarm, and then push the
return (RTN) button to access the voltage
settings. Using the Push Dial, adjust the
voltage as desired and/or determined by
the transmitter battery pack being utilized. The voltage options range from 4.2V to 7.4V. Suggested voltage settings are as follows:
5-Cell NiCd or NiMH: 5.6V
2-Cell LiFe: 6.0V
*Regarding low battery voltage: All models included in one
12K transmitter will be changed together. The voltage cannot
be set to a separate value for each model, nor will data reset
be carried out.
96 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter will
vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
Warning normally resetting method
1.Move the cursor to the item you want to reset to OFF and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
2.Select the OFF mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
*The display blinks.
3.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
TELEM.SET.
Telemetry setting
This screen does the following setting of
telemetry.
Telemetry speech
Telemetry logging
Telemetry alarm
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
● Select [TELEM.SET.] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
The speech language installed is
indicated. When the speech data is
not installed, "----------" is displayed.
The version No. of the speech data
file is indicated. When the speech
data is not installed, nothing is
displayed.
The interval of speech can be set.
The setting range is from 0 [Sec] to
30 [Sec].
Telemetry Data Logging
You must have a micro SD card inserted to use data logging.
ACT/INH button, ON/OFF switch and INTERVAL button has been added to "TELEM.SET." screen.
When the LOGGING is set to ACT and ON, data will be logged based on the INTERVAL set.
When the logging function
is ON, "ON" is displayed
here. Logging ON/OFF
switch.
ACT/INH
Logging ON/OFF switch
Logged data is written to
the SD at the interval input
here
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
97
This is a hardware for the pause switch of the telemetry
logging function.
If the pause switch is turned on while the telemetry data is
recorded, recording the telemetry data to the memory card
is stopped temporarily. When the pause switch is turned off,
logging the telemetry data is resumed and recorded to same
data file after the interval time.
◆ The T12K writes a tiny file system to the micro SD
card. Please note the following information about
Data Logging.
* Approximately 0.3 sec is needed to write a new file
to the micro SD card. This means the actual start of
logging data is 0.3 Sec after the logging switch is turned
on.
* A maximum of 6393 records can be saved per file.
(Each record contains the elapsed time, CH data and the
telemetry data.)
* If the maximum of 6393 records is reached during the
logging process, the T12K will automatically create a
new file and continue to log data. Remember, if the
system takes approximately 0.3 sec to create the new
file, there will be a lapse in the logged data during that
period of time.
*The file names of the logged data on the micro SD card
are fixed. The first file will be labeled "LOG1".
If the logging ON/OFF switch is cycled during the same
flying session, the data will continue to be written to
LOG1. However, if the maximum number of records is
reached (6393), the system will create a new file named
"LOG2". If additional files are needed they will be named
sequentially, "LOG3", LOG4 and so on.
The logged elapsed time will continue to count in each
of the log files.
Log files may be merged after being imported into a
spreadsheet or similar software.
* When the INTERVAL is 0sec, the actual interval time is
set to approximately 0.1 Sec.
* FFS Ver.3.0 (free download) is necessary to export the
logged data from the micro SD card.
The "Export" function of FFS Ver. 3.0. creates a .cvs file
from the LOGx data file. The delimiter of the exported
files will be "comma" or "semi-colon" based on the
default setting of the PC used to import the data.
Caution
* Please do NOT use MODEL SELECT function while the
logging function is ON.
TELEMETRY DATA LOG (icon)
The card icon indicates that the telemetry data logging function works at HOME screen and TELEM.
MONI screen.
Logging data is stopped.
Logging data is running.
Logging data is stopped.
Logging data is running.
98 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
Telemetry Alarm Duration and Repeat Time
The repeat time and duration time for the telemetry alarm (buzzer, vibration and speech) can be set.
■ REPEAT
It is a repeat time of an alarm output.
Setting range:INH,1s ~ 240s
■ DURATION
It is an alarm output time.
Setting range:1s ~ 30s
*DURATION value has to be less than REPEAT value.
*DURATION time is extended when the other alarm event occurs.
Page 2/2
DURATION is not displayed when
REPEAT is INH.
DURATION value has to be equal
or less than REPEAT value.
[ Duration and Repeat Time for Telemetry Alarm ]
Sensor A
Alarm
ON
Sensor B
Alarm
ON
Alarm output
(Buzzer,
Vibration,
Speech)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
DURATION time
REPEAT time
When the new alarm event
occurs, DURATION time is
extended.
Time
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
99
TELEMETRY
Displaying data from the receiver
This screen displays your choice of data from the
receiver.
Also warnings can be activated regarding
other data from your aircraft. For example, if the
receiver voltage drops, the user can be warned by
an alarm (and vibration).
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
● [TELEMETRY] can be called if the HOME/EXIT button
is pushed from a home screen.
● Select [TELEMETRY] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
● Receiver -> Transmitter. The
reception strength is shown.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● Push S1 button to advance to next page.
How to see telemetry data
1.Telemetry screen can be called if the HOME/
EXIT button is pushed from the home screen.
Or select [TELEMETRY] in the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen by pushing the
RTN button.
2.If each item is chosen and the RTN button is
pushed, an alarm setup can be performed
with the minimum/maximum after a
transmitter is turned on.
*Receiver voltage can be checked immediately. An optional
sensor will need to be attached to S.BUS2 of a receiver if
you would like to see other information.
*No special setup is necessary if each sensor displayed
is left as in the default setup. Separate sensor ID
is also unnecessary. However, if two or more of
one kind of sensor is used, setup is required in the
"SENSOR" menu.
100 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
Warning
Do not watch the transmitter screen during
flight.
*You may lose sight of the aircraft during flight and this is
extremely dangerous. Have an assistant on hand to check
the screen for you. A pilot should NEVER take his eyes
off his aircraft.
Telemetry Speech function
*There are two languages available in the Speech data, English
and German.
*The language chosen for the Speech data will affect only the
Speech function. It will not change the language used in the
transmitter's text display.
*The Speech function can only be used with headphones
plugged into the phone jack.
*You will need to purchase headphones or earphones with a
3.5plug.
Earphone plug
●ACT/INH button and ON/OFF switch button
of the speech function are added to the
telemetry alert screen.
ACT/INH button
●When the telemetry alert occurred, the
speech function works.
When the ALERT button is ACT, the
speech function works when the alert
occurs.
*The format of the speech output is
"warning" [sensor type][data][unit]
Ex. Rx battery
「warning」「battery」「four point zero」「volt」
*If the telemetry data is changed frequently, the speech data
will not be the same as the displayed data.
ON/OFF button
When the speech function is valid, "on" is displayed.
When the speech function is INH or the switch is off,
nothing is displayed.
The speech function does not work when the
telemetry data is not received, even if "on" is
displayed.
*The format of the speech output is
[sensor type][data][unit][data][data][data][data]
Ex. Rx battery
「battery」
「seven point four」
「volt」
「seven point four」
「seven
point four」「seven point four」「seven point four」
*If the telemetry data is changed frequently, the speech data
will not be the same as the displayed data.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
101
TELEM.MONI (The extension of the number of telemetry data which is shown)
The number of telemetry data which is displayed to TELEM.MONI screen is extended. It is 16 items
(4 pages) maximum.
The page number is memorized automatically.
Then, TELEM.MONI screen shows the page which was shown previously.
*The page is memorized even if the power is turned off.
It pushes from
HOME screen.
To TELEMETRY MONITOR
In T-FHSS Air 14CH mode, you can display any items on the telemetry
screen up to 16 total. The benefit of expansion of a character will be
obtained by choosing the display items 1 and 2.
Ex. 1 item is displayed
Ex. 4-16 items are displayed
102 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
Ex. 2 items are displayed
TELEMETRY MONITOR set up
① The HOME/EXIT button is pushed from HOME screen and TELEMETRY
MONITOR is called.
② Move the cursor to the "RECEIVER" or "SENSOR" (SBS-XXX etc.) and
push the RTN button.
If a cursor is moved to items (Rx-BATT,
EXT-VOL, TEMP. etc.) and RTN is pushed,
the alarm setting screen of the item will be
displayed.
③ You will use the "Display" function to choose how many sensors are
shown on your Telemetry monitor.
[ Display position ]
1
1
2
1
2
3
4
④ If you want to show two sensors on your Telemetry screen, select 2 in
"Display". Then move down to the Sensor to select which other item is
shown.
When using a sensor that has two or more functions, you will want to
scroll to select which will be displayed. (ALTITUDE,VARIO, etc.)
⑤ If you want to show three sensors on your Telemetry screen,
select 3 in "Display". Then move down to the Sensor to select
which other item is shown.
⑥ To SENSOR " ----------" selection will reduce a display item.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
103
TELEMETRY : Rx-BATT.
In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver is
displayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
Displaying data from the receiver battery voltage
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
● Select [Rx-BATT.] in the TELEMETRY screen and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
● The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
● Receiver battery voltage
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↓The "down" arrow will
indicate that an alarm will
sound when the voltage
drops to below the setting.
"Vibes" type
Alert set
1.Move the cursor to the ↓ALERT [INH] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.Move the cursor to the ↓THRESHOLD [4.0V]
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~8.4V
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
104 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
If the following types are selected, the transmitter will
vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
TELEMETRY : EXT-VOLT
Displaying data from the EXT battery voltage port
*CA-RVIN-700 or SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
The EXT-VOLT screen will display the data from
the EXT-battery output from the R3008SB receiver.
In order to use this function, it is necessary to
connect external voltage connector of the R3008SB
receiver to a CA-RVIN-700 (FUTM5551) or
SBS-01V to the battery you desire to measure the
voltage of.
You will be alerted by an alarm or vibration if
the voltage set by you is exceeded.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
● Select [EXT-VOLT] in the TELEMETRY screen and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
● The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
● EXT battery voltage
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↓The arrow will indicate that
an alarm will sound when
the voltage drops to below
the setting.
"Vibes" type
Alert set
1.Move the cursor to the ↓ALERT [INH] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.Move the cursor to the ↓THRESHOLD [4.0V]
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~100.0V
If the following types are selected, the transmitter will
vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
105
TELEMETRY : TEMP.
Displaying data from the temperature
*A temperature sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
TEMP is a screen which displays/sets up
the temperature information from an optional
temperature sensor.
The temperature of the model (engine, motor,
battery etc.) which is flying can be displayed.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
● Select [TEMP.] in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
● The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
● Temperature
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↑ An upward arrow will
show that an alarm
will sound when the
temperature rises
above the set value.
●Push the S1 button to advance to the next page.
● ↓ A downward arrow
will show that an
alarm will sound when
the temperature
drops below the set
value.
Alert set : Hot warning
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
Alert set : Low-temperature warning
1.Move the cursor to the ↑ALERT item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.Move the cursor to the ↑THRESHOLD [+100℃ ]
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: +100℃
Adjustment range: -19℃ ~200℃
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
1.2/2 page is accessed by pushing S1. Move
the cursor to the ↓ALERT item and push the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.Move the cursor to the ↓THRESHOLD [+0 ℃ ]
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: +0℃
Adjustment range: -20℃ ~199℃
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
106 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
TELEMETRY : RPM
RPM is a screen which displays / sets up the
RPM information from an optional RPM sensor.
The RPM of the model (engine, motor, etc.)
which is flying can be shown.
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an
alarm and/or vibration will alert you.
● Select [RPM] in the TELEMETRY screen
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
Displaying data from the RPM
*A RPM sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode.
● The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
● RPM
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↑An upward arrow ●Push the S1 button to advance to the next page.
indicates that the
alarm will sound
when the RPM rises
above the set value.
● ↓A downward arrow
indicates that the
alarm will sound
when the RPM falls
below the set value.
●Select the sensor you use.
SBS-01RM : MAGNETIC
SBS-01RO : OPTICAL
SBS-01RB : BLS MOTOR
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
● In "MAGNETIC", the gear ratio of your
engine (motor) you are using is entered.
● In "BLS MOTOR", the number of poles your
brushless motor you are using is entered.
Alert set : Over rotations
1.Move the cursor to the ↑ALERT item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.Move the cursor to the ↑THRESHOLD [2000
rpm] item and push the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 2000rpm
Adjustment range: 1rpm~150,000rpm
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
● In "OPTICAL", the number
of blades of the propeller
( r o t o r ) your model is
entered.
Alert set : Under rotations
1.Scroll to the second page by pushing S1.
Move the cursor to the ↓ALERT item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.Move the cursor to the ↓THRESHOLD [0rpm]
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0rpm
Adjustment range: 0rpm~149,999rpm
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
107
TELEMETRY : ALTITUDE
Displaying data from the altitude
*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
ALTITUDE is a screen which displays / sets up the
altitude information from an optional altitude sensor or
GPS sensor. The altitude of the model which is flying
can be known. You can set an alarm to sound when the
model flies above your preset maximum altitude. You
can also choose to receive your warning as a vibration.
The initial altitude data that appears when your power
supply is turned on will be zero meters. From there, it
displays your altitude as it changes. Even if the altitude
of an airfield is high, that shall be 0 m and the altitude
difference from an airfield is displayed. This sensor
calculates the altitude from atmospheric pressure.
Atmospheric pressure will get lower as you go up in
altitude. Using this the sensor will estimate the altitude.
Please understand that an exact advanced display cannot
be performed if atmospheric pressure changes in a
weather situation.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
● Select [ALTITUDE] in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN button.
● The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
● Altitude
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↑ A n u p w a r d a r r o w ●Push the S1 button to advance to the next page.
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
altitude reaches
above your set value.
● ↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
altitude reaches below
your set value.
First, you need to set a reference point.
1.The model and transmitter to which the
altitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2.Move the cursor to the [SET] of "REFERENCE"
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input and
return to the original state, push the S1 button.)
*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather
also at the same airfield. You should preset before a flight.
Alert set : High side
1.Move the cursor to the ↑ALERT item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.Move the cursor to the ↑THRESHOLD [+200m]
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: +200m
Adjustment range: -499m~+5,000m
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
108 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
Alert set : Low side
1.Scroll to the second page by pushing S1. Move
the cursor to the ↓ALERT item and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.Move the cursor to the ↓THRESHOLD [-50m]
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: -50m
Adjustment range: -500m~+4,999m
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input and
return to the original state, push the S1 button.)
TELEMETRY : VARIO
Displaying data from the variometer
*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
status, the T12K incorporates a different melody
VARIO is a screen which displays / sets up the
for ascent and descent. Additionally, depending
variometer information from an optional altitude
upon the rate of climb or descent, the tones vary to
sensor or GPS sensor.
indicate whether or not the airplane is climbing or
The variometer of the model which is flying can
descending at a rapid rate.
be known.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an
alarm and / or vibration will alert you.
To ensure that the pilot is aware as to the model's
● Select [VARIO] in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
● The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
● Variometer
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↑ An upward arrow ●Push the S1 button to advance to the next page.
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
vario reaches above
your set value.
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
● ↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
vario reaches below
your set value.
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
● If this is set to ACT, a melody will be activated during the
rise or dive, depending on your set values.
Alert set : Rise side
1.Move the cursor to the ↑ALERT item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.Move the cursor to the ↑THRESHOLD [+0m/
s]item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: +0m/s
Adjustment range: -49m/s~+50m/s
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
Alert set : Dive side
1.Scroll to the second page by pushing S1.
Move the cursor to the ↓ALERT item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.Move the cursor to the ↓THRESHOLD [+0m/
s] item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: +0m/s
Adjustment range: -50m/s~+49m/s
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input and
return to the original state, push the S1 button.)
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
109
The vario melody outputs from the phone jack.
*The melody function plays a different electronic melody
when rising and diving.
*To take advantage of this feature, a Futaba Telemetry Sensor
(such as SBS-01A/02A, SBS-01G/02G, VARIO-F1712,
VARIO-F1672 or GPS-F1672, sold separately) must be
installed.
When the melody function is active, the
vario melody outputs from the phone jack.
Vario Melody Setting
■ RANGE
This is the variable range of the Vario Melody.
↑ (Climb side) : When the variometer is greater than this
value, Vario melody is not variable.
Setting range:OFFSET value ~ +50m/s(SBS-01/02A,SBS-01/02G)
OFFSET value ~ +50.0m/s (GPS-F1675,
VARIO-F1712)
OFFSET value ~ +300.00m/s (VARIO-F1672)
↓ (Sink side) : When the variometer is less than this value,
Vario melody is not variable.
Setting range:-50m/s ~ OFFSET value(SBS-01/02A,SBS-01/02G)
-50.0m/s ~ OFFSET value (GPS-F1675,
VARIO-F1712)
-300.00m/s ~ OFFSET value (VARIO-F1672)
■ OFFSET
The priority of the phone output is below:
Speaking Alarm >> Speaking data >> Vario Melody
(High priority)
(Low priority)
The melody function can be turned on and off
with the specified switch.
When the melody
function is active, “on”
is displayed.
This is the changing point of climb and sink. When the
variometer is greater than this value, Vario Melody is climb
type. When the variometer is less than this value, Vario
Melody is sink type.
Setting range : RANGE↑setting value ~ RANGE↓ setting
value
■ DEADBAND
Vario Melody is not output in this range.
↑ (Climb side) : When the variometer is less than this value,
Vario melody is not output.
Page 3/4
Climb side value of RANGE
Current variometer
value
Melody function switch display. When the cursor is
moved to this option and the RTN button is pushed, the
display changes to the switch selection screen.
Sink side value of
RANGE
The changing point
of climb and sink
Vario Melody Volume
The Vario Melody Volume to adjust by the
hardware. (stick, trim, lever, switch)
This is the volume of Vario Melody only.
Setting range:0 (silent) ~ 30 (maximum)
The hardware for the adjustment is selectable.
Setting range:J1,J2,J3,J4,T1,T2,T3,T4,SA,SB,
SC,SD,SE,SF,SG,SH,LS,LD,RD,RS
The operation mode of the adjustment hardware is
selectable.
ATL+ : When the operation direction is right or down or C.W. ,
the volume is increased.
ATL- : When the operation direction is right or down or C.W. ,
the volume is decreased.
SYM. : The center position is minimum volume. The Both end
points are maximum volume.
● Select [SOUND] in the System menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
Vario Melody only
PHONE VOLUME is
moved to page 2/2.
The hardware is
selectable.
The mode is selectable.
110 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
Sink side value of
DEADBAND
Climb side value of
DEADBAND
[The relation of Vario Melody settings]
Climb side
(Discontinuous sounds)
Fixed melody
Variable melody
RANGE↑
OFFSET
Not sound
Sink side
(Continuous sounds)
Variable melody
DEADBAND↑ DEADBAND↓
Fixed melody
RANGE↓
(m/s)
■ DELAY
The output vario melody does not change during
the delay time. In other words, this is a minimum
time of Vario melody output.
Setting range:0.0,0.5,1.0,1.5 sec
*This parameter is effective to all variometers.
Page 4/4 The minimum time
o f o n e Va r i o M e l o d y
output.
Vario Melody Volume
These parameters are same as
VARIO MELODY phone volume
in page 2/2 of SOUND screen.
[Vario Melody Delay]
Variometer(m/s)
Actually variometer
Output Vario Melody
+-0m/s
DELAY time
Time(sec)
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
111
TELEMETRY : BATTERY
In this screen, the battery voltage is displayed.
In order to use this function, it is necessary to
connect external voltage connector of R3008SB ⇔
SBS-01V ⇔ Battery
SBS-01V measures two batteries. The drive
battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXTVOLT. The battery for receivers connected to 3P
lines is displayed here.
Displaying data from the battery voltage
*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
● Select [BATTERY] in the TELEMETRY screen and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
● The maximum and the minimum when
powering ON are shown.
● battery voltage
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↓The arrow will indicate that
an alarm will sound when
the voltage drops to below
the setting.
Alert set
1.Move the cursor to the ↓ALERT [INH] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.Move the cursor to the ↓THRESHOLD [4.0V]
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 4.0V
Adjustment range: 0.0V~8.4V
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
112 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter will
vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
TELEMETRY : DISTANCE
The Distance screen displays and sets altitude
data from an SBS-01G/02G GPS Sensor (sold
separately), and allows the distance to the airborne
aircraft to be read by the transmitter. When the
aircraft flies inside or outside the set distance an
alarm and vibration alerts the pilot.
Displaying data from the Distance Screen
*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*The GPS sensor is necessary, and is sold separately. Mount
and connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor
instruction manual.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
●This indicates the receiving accuracy from a GPS satellite. When
three bars are displayed, the GPS is ready for use. Pushing
[REFERENCE] sets the current aircraft position as the starting point. ● T h i s i n d i c a t e s M a x i m u m
Distance the aircraft flew to.
● Select [DISTANCE] in the TELEMETRY screen and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
●Current distance
button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● The ↑arrow shows
that an alarm is
generated when
the set value is
exceeded.
●Push the S1 button to advance to the next page.
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
● The ↓arrow shows
that an alarm is
generated when
the distance drops
below the set value. ●Distance alarm setting range 0m ~ 4,999m
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
Setting the reference position
1.Turn on the transmitter and the model with
the GPS sensor installed in it.
2. Wait for the GPS accuracy indicator to
display three bars.
3.Move the cursor to REFERENCE [SET] and push
the RTN button. The model's current position
is now stored and the distance is set to 0 yd.
4. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input and
return to the original state, push the S1 button.)
*Now, the position of the present model was set to 0 m.
Setting a "too far" alert distance
1.Move the cursor to the ↑ALERT item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. 2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
●Distance alarm setting
range 1m ~ 5,000m
*Alarm when the aircraft moves far
away.
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
4.Move the cursor to the ↓THRESHOLD [1,000m]
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the distance by scrolling the Push dial.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
*Positioning time of GPS
A short time is required until the positioning of
the GPS is established. In the meantime, don't
move the model during this process. Wait until
the GPS sensor's LED turns solid green. If it is
blinking green it is still acquiring the satellite
signals.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
113
Setting a "too close" alert distance.
1.Access the second page by pushing S1.
Move the cursor to the ↓ALERT item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.Move the cursor to the ↓THRESHOLD [0yd]
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button.
● Selecting Surface or Slant distances [DISTANCE] in the TELEMETRY screen by
pushing the RTN button once and the S1 button twice.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
●Altitude calculated as
either straight line
distance (slant) or surface
distance on a map can
also be selected
(3/3)
●Current position display.
N: North latitude, E: East longitude
nt
Sla
Altitude
Surface
Two distance calculation methods are available
Surface (straight line distance), and Slant may be
selected.
1. Select page 3 by pushing the S1 button twice
from the “DISTANCE” screen.
2. Select <SLANT> <SURFACE> next to “MODE”,
scroll either to the desired method and push
the RTN button.
114 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
TELEMETRY : SPEED
The speed screen displays and sets the speed
data from an SBS-01G/02G (GPS sensor) sold
separately.
The speed of the aircraft during flight can be
displayed.
After flight, the maximum speed during flight
can be viewed. Because this speed is based on
Displaying data from the speed
*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
position data from a GPS satellite, the ground speed
is displayed instead of air speed. Consequently,
with a head wind, the displayed speed decreases
and with a tail wind, the displayed speed increases.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
● Select [SPEED] in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN button.
● Displays the maximum speed after
the transmitter is turned on.
●Displays the current speed
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
●Push the S1 button to advance to the next page.
● The ↑ arrow shows
that an alarm is
generated when
the speed exceeds
the set value.
● The ↓ arrow shows
that an alarm is
generated when
the speed drops
below the set value.
●Speed alarm setting range 0 ~ 499km/h
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the speed has decreased.
Alert setting when speed increases
●Speed alarm setting range
1 ~ 500km/h
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the speed has increased.
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.The speed at which an alarm is generated
can be set by selecting the numerical display
next to “ ↓ THRESHOLD” and pushing the RTN
button. This sounds an alarm when the speed
decreases.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
1. Set “↑ALERT” on the <SPEED> screen to ACT.
Move the cursor to INH and push the RTN
button.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
4. The speed at which an alarm is generated can
reset to the initial value.
be set by selecting the speed display next to “↑ 6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
THRESHOLD” and pushing the RTN button. This
and return to the original state, push the S1
generates an alarm when the speed increases.
button.)
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
*Speed alarm precaution
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
Alert setting when speed decreases
1. Select page 2 by pushing S1 from the <SPEED>
screen and set “ ↓ ALERT” to ACT.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push dial.
Since the GPS speed sensor displays the ground speed, it
cannot be used as a stall alarm. For example, an aircraft that
stalls at 50km/h will stall if the tailwind is 5km/h or greater
even through 55km/h is displayed by ground speed. In
addition, with an aircraft that will disintegrate in midflight at
400km/h at an over-speed alarm, when the headwind reaches
30km/h the airplane will disintegrate in midair due to over
speeding even at a ground speed of 370km/h.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
115
TELEMETRY : Servo sensor
[Current]
Displaying data from the S.BUS servo
The SBS-01S can monitor and display the
in-flight current, operating angle, and internal
temperature of up to two S.BUS2 servos.
If you forget to connect the servo wiring during
fuselage assembly, or the servo was disconnected,
an alarm can be activated at the transmitter.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
TO Receiver
S.BUS2 Port
*SBS-01S must be installed in the aircraft.
Servo #1
Servo #2
SBS-01S
S.BUS2 servo
When it's servo 2, select #2.
● Select [CURR.#1] in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN button.
● Displays the maximum/minimum data
after the transmitter is turned on.
●Displays the current data
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↑ An upward arrow ●Push the S1 button to advance to the next page.
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
current reaches
above your set value.
● ↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
current reaches below
your set value.
●Current alarm setting range 0 ~ 9.9A
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the current has decreased.
Alert setting when servo #1 current increases
1. Set “↑ALERT” on the <CURR.#1> screen to
ACT. Move the cursor to INH and push the RTN
button.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4. The current at which an alarm is generated
can be set by selecting the current display next
to “↑ THRESHOLD” and pushing the RTN button.
This generates an alarm when the current
increases.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
●Current alarm setting range
0.1 ~ 10A
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the current has increased.
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
Alert setting when servo #1 current decreases
1. Select page 2 by pushing S1 from the
<CURR.#1> screen and set “ ↓ ALERT” to ACT.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.The current at which an alarm is generated
can be set by selecting the numerical display
next to “ ↓ THRESHOLD” and pushing the RTN
button. This sounds an alarm when the current
decreases.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input 6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
button.)
116 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
TELEMETRY : Servo sensor
[Temperature]
Displaying data from the S.BUS servo
The SBS-01S can monitor and display the inflight internal temperature of up to two S.BUS2
servos.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
TO Receiver
S.BUS2 Port
*SBS-01S must be installed in the aircraft.
Servo #1
Servo #2
SBS-01S
S.BUS2 servo
When it's servo 2, select #2.
● Select [TEMP.#1] in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN button.
● Displays the maximum/minimum data
after the transmitter is turned on.
●Displays the current data
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↑ An upward arrow ●Push the S1 button to advance to the next page.
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
temperature reaches
above your set value.
● ↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
temperature reaches
below your set value.
●Temp alarm setting range -10 ~ 114℃
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the temp has decreased.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Temp alarm setting range
-9 ~ 115℃
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the temp has increased.
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
Alert setting when servo #1 temperature increases Alert setting when servo #1 temperature decreases
1. Set “↑ALERT” on the <TEMP.#1> screen to ACT.
Move the cursor to INH and push the RTN
button.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4. The temperature at which an alarm is
generated can be set by selecting the
temperature display next to “↑ THRESHOLD”
and pushing the RTN button. This generates an
alarm when the temperature increases.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
1. Select page 2 by pushing S1 from the
<TEMP.#1> screen and set “ ↓ ALERT” to ACT.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.The temperature at which an alarm is
generated can be set by selecting the
numerical display next to “ ↓ THRESHOLD”
and pushing the RTN button. This sounds an
alarm when the temperature decreases.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input 6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
button.)
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
117
TELEMETRY : Servo sensor
[Angle]
Displaying data from the S.BUS servo
The SBS-01S can monitor and display the inflight angle and internal temperature of up to two
S.BUS2 servos.
If you forget to connect the servo wiring during
fuselage assembly, or the servo was disconnected,
an alarm can be activated at the transmitter.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
*SBS-01S must be installed in the aircraft.
When it's servo 2, select #2.
● Select [ANGLE #1] in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN button.
● Displays the maximum/minimum data
after the transmitter is turned on.
●Displays the angle data
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↑ An upward arrow ●Push the S1 button to advance to the next page.
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
angle reaches above
your set value.
● ↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
angle reaches below
your set value.
1. Set “↑ALERT” on the <ANGLE#1> screen to
ACT. Move the cursor to INH and push the RTN
button.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4. The angle at which an alarm is generated can
be set by selecting the angle display next to “↑
THRESHOLD” and pushing the RTN button. This
generates an alarm when the angle increases.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the angle has increased.
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
●Angle alarm setting range -180 ~ +179.9°
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD) *Alarm when the angle has decreased.
Alert setting when servo #1 angle increases
●Angle alarm setting range
-179.9 ~ +180°
TYPE 4
Alert setting when servo #1 angle decreases
1. Select page 2 by pushing S1 from the
<ANGLE#1> screen and set “ ↓ ALERT” to ACT.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.The angle at which an alarm is generated
can be set by selecting the numerical display
next to “ ↓ THRESHOLD” and pushing the RTN
button. This sounds an alarm when the angle
decreases.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is 5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
reset to the initial value.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
reset to the initial value.
and return to the original state, push the S1 6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
button.)
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
Connect Alarm setting
If you forget to connect the servo wiring during
fuselage assembly, or the servo was disconnected,
an alarm can be activated at the transmitter.
*This alarm and display is limited to the S.BUS
servos connected to the servo sensors.
118 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
1. Set “CONNECTION” on the <ANGLE> screen to
ACT. Move the cursor to INH and push the RTN
button.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push dial.
3. Push the RTN button.
TELEMETRY : Current sensor
[Current]
Displaying data from the drive battery current
The SBS-01C has the capability of measuring
current, voltage and capacity (consumption) from
drive battery all at the same time.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
*SBS-01C must be installed in the aircraft.
Drive
ESC
Battery
Motor
to Receiver
SBS-01C
● Select [CURRENT] in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN button.
● Displays the maximum/minimum data
after the transmitter is turned on.
●Displays the current data
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↑ An upward arrow ●Push the S1 button to advance to the next page.
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
current reaches
above your set value.
● ↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
current reaches below
your set value.
●Current alarm setting range -150A ~ 150A
●Current alarm setting range
-150A ~ 150A
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the current has increased.
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the current has decreased.
Alert setting when current increases
1. Set “↑ALERT” on the <CURRENT> screen to
ACT. Move the cursor to INH and push the RTN
button.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4. The current at which an alarm is generated
can be set by selecting the current display next
to “↑ THRESHOLD” and pushing the RTN button.
This generates an alarm when the current
increases.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
Alert setting when current decreases
1. Select page 2 by pushing S1 from the
<CURRENT> screen and set “ ↓ ALERT” to ACT.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4.The current at which an alarm is generated
can be set by selecting the numerical display
next to “ ↓ THRESHOLD” and pushing the RTN
button. This sounds an alarm when the current
decreases.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input 6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
button.)
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
119
TELEMETRY : Current sensor
[Voltage]
Displaying data from the drive battery voltage
The SBS-01C has the capability of measuring
current, voltage and capacity (consumption) from
drive battery all at the same time.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
*SBS-01C must be installed in the aircraft.
Drive
ESC
Battery
Motor
to Receiver
SBS-01C
● Select [VOLTAGE] in the TELEMETRY screen and access the
setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN button.
● Displays the maximum/minimum data
after the transmitter is turned on.
●Displays the voltage data
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↑ An upward arrow ●Push the S1 button to advance to the next page.
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
voltage reaches
above your set value.
● ↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
voltage reaches
below your set value.
●Voltage alarm setting range 0.0V ~ 70.0V
●Voltage alarm setting range
0.0V ~ 70.0V
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the voltage has increased.
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the voltage has decreased.
Alert setting when voltage increases
1. Set “↑ALERT” on the <VOLTAGE> screen to
ACT. Move the cursor to INH and push the RTN
button.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4. The voltage at which an alarm is generated
can be set by selecting the voltage display
next to “↑ THRESHOLD” and pushing the RTN
button. This generates an alarm when the
voltage increases.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
Alert setting when voltage decreases
1. Select page 2 by pushing S1 from the
<VOLTAGE> screen and set “ ↓ ALERT” to ACT.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4. The voltage at which an alarm is generated
can be set by selecting the numerical display
next to “ ↓ THRESHOLD” and pushing the
RTN button. This sounds an alarm when the
voltage decreases.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input 6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
button.)
120 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
TELEMETRY : Current sensor
[Capacity]
The SBS-01C has the capability of measuring
current, voltage and capacity (consumption) from
drive battery all at the same time.
Displaying data from the drive battery capacity
*SBS-01C must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in S-FHSS mode
Drive
ESC
Battery
Motor
to Receiver
SBS-01C
● Select [CAPACITY] in the TELEMETRY screen
and access the setup screen shown below by
pushing the RTN button.
● Displays the maximum/minimum data
after the transmitter is turned on.
●Displays the capacity data
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● ↑ An upward arrow ●Push the S1 button to advance to the next page.
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
capacity reaches
above your set value.
● ↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
capacity reaches
below your set value.
Alert setting when capacity increases
1. Set “↑ALERT” on the <CAPACITY> screen to
ACT. Move the cursor to INH and push the RTN
button.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4. The capacity at which an alarm is generated
can be set by selecting the capacity display
next to “↑ THRESHOLD” and pushing the RTN
button. This generates an alarm when the
capacity increases.
5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
●Capacity alarm setting range
-32,000mAh ~ -32,000mAh
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the capacity has increased.
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
●Capacity alarm setting range -32,000mAh ~ -32,000mAh
(↑THRESHOLD > ↓THRESHOLD)
*Alarm when the capacity has decreased.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
TYPE 4
Alert setting when capacity decreases
1. Select page 2 by pushing S1 from the
<CAPACITY> screen and set “ ↓ ALERT” to
ACT.
2.Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
3. Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
4. The capacity at which an alarm is generated
can be set by selecting the numerical display
next to “ ↓ THRESHOLD” and pushing the
RTN button. This sounds an alarm when the
capacity decreases.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is 5. Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
reset to the initial value.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
reset to the initial value.
and return to the original state, push the S1 6.Push the RTN button. (To terminate the input
button.)
and return to the original state, push the S1
button.)
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
121
SENSOR
Various telemetry sensors setting
This screen registers the telemetry sensors used
with the transmitter. When only one of a certain
type of sensor is used, this setting is unnecessary
and the sensor can be used by simply connecting it
to the S.BUS2 port of the transmitter.
When using 2 or more of the same kind of
sensor, they must be registered here.
● Select [SENSOR] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by
pushing the RTN button.
[What is a slot?]
Servos are classified by CH, but sensors are
classified in units called “slot”. There are slots
from No. 1 to No. 31.
Altitude sensors, GPS sensors and other data
sensor units may use multiple slots.
When using a sensor which requires two or
more slots, the number of slots is automatically
assigned by setting up a start slot.
When 2 or more of the same kind of sensor are
used, the sensors themselves must allocate unused
slots and memorize that slot.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
(SBS-01RM)
(SBS-01RO)
(SBS-01RB)
*3 slots of altitude sensor are used.
*8 slots of GPS sensor are used.
● Sensor ID: When multiple sensors of the
same type are not used, ID is unnecessary.
● As shown in the table below, an altimeter requires 3 contiguous slots
and a GPS sensor requires 8 contiguous slots. In addition, since the GPS
(SBS-01G/02G) start slots are 8, 16, and 24, slots 6 and 7 are inhibited.
< Assignable slot >
*Altimeter, GPS, and other sensors that display a large amount of data require multiple slots.
*Depending on the type of sensor, the slot numbers that can be allocated may be limited.
The required
number of slots
SBS-01T/TE/TE(TEMP)
1 slot
SBS-01RM/RO/RB(RPM)
1 slot
Sensor
SBS-01V(Voltage)
2 slots
SBS-01A/02A(Altitude)
3 slots
SBS-01C
3 slots
SBS-01S(S.BUS servo)
6 slots
SBS-01G/02G(GPS)
Robbe TEMP125-F1713
8 slots
1 slot
Robbe VARIO-F1712
2 slots
Robbe VARIO-F1672
2 slots
Robbe CURR-F1678
3 slots
Robbe GPS-F1675
Robbe True Airspeed
Sensor 450
Castle-TL0
Kontronik
PowerBox
8 slots
The number which can be used as a start slot
1 ~ 31
1 ~ 31
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
1,2,8,9,10,16,17,18,
24,25,26
8,16,24
1 ~ 31
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
8,16,24
1 slot
1 ~ 31
8 slots
8 slots
16 slots
8,16,24
8,16,24
8,16
122 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
Selling area
Global
Europe
SENSOR : RELOAD
This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.
When using multiple sensors of the same type
the sensors must be registered in the transmitter.
Connect all the sensors to be used to the T12K as
shown in the figure at the right and register them by
the following procedure. The ID of each sensor is
registered in the transmitter.
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
● Call page 7 by pushing the S1 button 6 times from
the [SENSOR] menu.
3-way hub
or Y-harnesses
Receiver's
battery
All the sensors to be used are connected.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
Reading all the sensors to be used
1. Connect all the sensors and receiver
batteries to be used to the T12K through a
hub as shown in the figure above.
2. Move the cursor to “RELOAD” on page 7 of
the [SENSOR] screen.
3. Push the RTN button.
All the sensors are registered and can be
used.
SENSOR : REGISTER
This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.
This function registers an additional sensor.
Connect the sensor as shown in the figure at the
right and register it by the following procedure.
The sensor ID is registered in the transmitter.
Additional sensor registration
3-way hub
or Y-harnesses
SENSOR
1. Connect the sensor and receiver battery to
be used to the T12K through a hub as shown
in the figure at the right.
2. Move the cursor to “REGISTER” on page 7 of
the <Sensor> screen.
3. Push the RTN button.
The sensor is registered and can be used.
Receivers
battery
*When the number of slots needed in registration is
insufficient, an error is displayed and registration cannot be
performed. Disable unused slots or perform the following
relocate.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
123
SENSOR : RELOCATE
Follow these instructions when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.
Use this function when repeated registration
and deregistration of slots has left open slots
fragmented and unusable. It rearranges them into
contiguous unused slots.
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
SENSOR
● Call page 7 by pushing the S1 button 6 times from
the [SENSOR] menu.
3-way hub
or Y-harnesses
Receiver's
battery
All the sensors to be used are connected.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
Relocate of sensors to be used
1. Connect all the sensors and receiver
batteries to be used to the T12K through a
hub as shown in the figure above.
2. Move the cursor to “RELOCATE” on page 7 of
the [SENSOR] screen.
3. Push the RTN button.
SENSOR : SET SLOT
This page is for using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.
This procedure changes the slot number of one
registered sensor.
Sensor slot change
124 <Functions of Linkage Menu>
3-way hub
or Y-harnesses
SENSOR
1. Connect the sensor and receiver battery to
be changed to the T12K through a hub as
shown in the figure above.
2. Move the cursor to “SET SLOT” on page 7 of
the <Sensor> screen.
3. Push the RTN button. A sensor details screen
appears.
4. Move the cursor to “LOAD” and push the RTN
button.
5. The current start slot is displayed. Move the
cursor to the number of the start slot and
change it to the desired value.(Cannot be
set to a slot that cannot be allocated like the
table of all pages.)
6. Move the cursor to “WRITE” and push the RTN
button.
Receivers
battery
DATA RESET
Model memory setting data reset.
This function is designed to allow you to reset
trim settings or all of the settings saved in the active
model memory. You may individually choose to
reset the following data:
All model setting:
Resets all Linkage and Model Menu functions
except for system and low battery voltage, Model
Select and Model Type.
*If the Model Type selected is Glider, the motor function
channel is automatically reversed in the Reverse menu; all
other channels remain normal.
T1~T4:
Reset the digital trim setting.
*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.
TELEMETRY:
● Select [DATA RESET] in the Linkage menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
●Select the function name
and return to the Linkage
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Reset the telemetry setting.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Data is entered
RETURN
Data resetting method
1. Move the cursor to the item you want to
reset and push the RTN button.
*A confirmation message appears.
2. Execute reset by pushing the RTN button for
one second. (Push the S1 button to cease
resetting.)
[T1-T4]: Resets only the T1-T4
[ALL MODEL SETTING]: Resets all Linkage and
Model Menu functions except for system
and low battery voltage, Model Select and
Model Type.
[TELEMETRY]: Resets only the telemetry
functions.
<Functions of Linkage Menu>
125
MODEL MENU (COMMON FUNCTIONS)
This section describes the D/R, program mixing,
and other functions common to all model types.
Before setting the model data, use the Model
Type function of the Linkage menu to select the
model type matched to the aircraft. If a different
model type is selected afterwards, the D/R, program
mixing, and other parameters are reset.
If either a helicopter or glider have been selected
as the model type, then the specific functions in the
Model menu can be set for each flight condition. If
you want to switch the settings for each condition
by switch, stick position, etc., use the Condition
Select function to add flight conditions. (Up to five
conditions can be used)
Note: The T12K is designed so that the airplane
and glider (including EP glider) model types
are compatible with aircraft of similar type
wings.
This section outlines the relationship between
the functions common to airplanes and
gliders, except some dedicated functions,
and model type.
The setting menus will depend on the number
of servos and other differences according to
the wing type used. The setup screens in the
instruction manual are typical examples.
● Call the model menu shown below with a
long push of the MDL button at the home
screen, etc.
<Push Dial>
●S e l e c t t h e f u n c t i o n
name and return to
the Model menu by
pushing the RTN button
or pushing the HOME/
EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Calling setup screen
●To next page
RETURN
● Select the function you want to set and
access the setup screen by pushing the RTN
button.
*The Model menu screen depends on the
model type.
Model Menu functions (Common) list
●SERVO
●DUAL RATE
Servo test and servo position display (For a
description of its functions, see the Linkage Menu
section.)
The D/R curve of a T12K transmitter may be
activated from a switch, stick, position, etc. For
information on how to do so, please refer to the
Switch Setting Method located at the back of this
manual.
●CONDITION (applicable to helicopter and
glider selections)
Flight conditions addition, deletion, copy,
condition renaming, and condition delay can be set.
126 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>
●PROG. MIX
The T12K transmitter allows up to five
completely customizable program mixes.
CONDITION
Flight condition's switch assignment, copy, priority change and
condition delay can be set [except airplane type].
This function, in the Model menu, can be used
to switch the settings of up to 5 flight conditions.
Please note this is not applicable to airplane type
selections.
Note: To prevent accidental activation of any
unused flight conditions during flight, set the
switch setting of those unused conditions to
null [--].
● A Condition Delay function can be set
to prevent unnecessary fuselage motion
which may be generated when there are
sudden changes in the servo positions and
when there are variations in the operating
time between channels during condition
switching. The delay can be set for each
channel to ensure maximum performance
from your aircraft.
When setting the delay function for a specific
flight condition, the related function changes
after a delay corresponding to the set
amount.
● If multiple conditions were set, their
operational priority may be customized as
desired.
● Select [CONDITION] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
(Currently selected condition name)
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To next page
RETURN
(Condition name)
(Condition switch)
Condition switch selection/deletion
1.Move the cursor to the switch item of the
condition you want to select/delete and
access the switch setup screen by pushing
the RTN button and select the switch and ON
direction.
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
push the RTN button.
Select the copy destination condition by
scrolling the Push dial. Then, push the RTN
button.
*The current condition cannot be selected for the copy
destination condition.
3.Move the cursor to the [COPY] item and push
the RTN button. A confirmation message
appears.
*The display blinks.
Condition copy
4. Push the RTN button for one second and the
copying is completed. (Push the S1 button to
stop copying.)
Priority change
(Setup screen page 3)
1.Move the cursor to the [SOURCE] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the copy source condition by scrolling
the Push dial. Then, push the RTN button.
2.Move the cursor to the [DESTIN.] item and
1. Move the cursor to the priority up-arrow or
down-arrow you want to change and push
the RTN button.
The priority of the corresponding condition is
changed. (The last condition becomes the
highest priority.)
*The Normal condition cannot be changed or moved. Its
priority is always the lowest.
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
127
Condition delay setting
(Setup screen page 2)
1.Select the condition which you want to set.
2. Move the cursor to the "DELAY" icon of the
channel you want to set and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the delay amount by scrolling the Push
dial.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
3.Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Condition Vibrator
When the condition is changed, it informs by
the vibrator.
The vibration patterns (4 types)
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
*Condition after switching, the vibrator is activated
by a slight delay.
128 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>
DUAL RATE
The angle and curve of each stick function can be set. [All model types]
Dual rate function is used to adjust the amount
of throw and the operational curve of the stick
functions (aileron, elevator and rudder) for each
flight condition or up to 5 rates for each function.
For airplane type, it is also possible to adjust the
operational curve of the throttle function.
This is normally used after the End Point
programming has been completed to define the
maximum throw. When mixing is applied from one
channel to another channel, both channels can be
adjusted at the same time by adjusting the operation
rate through the dual rate function.
Neutral position of the dual rate curve can be
set.
Dual rate curve of FLAP, FLAP3, BUTTERFLY,
and CAMBER function can be set. (Airplane/
Glider)
*FLAP3 and BUTTERFLY are glider only functions.
*EXP rate setting is not allowed in the FLAP, FLAP3,
BUTTERFLY, and CAMBER functions.
*Individual switch setting is not allowed in the FLAP,
FLAP3, and BUTTERFLY, CAMBER functions. (Condition
switching only)
● Select [DUAL RATE] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
●Left/right (up/down) rate
[Airplane]
●Operation curve (left/right, up/down)
●Function selection
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
●Neutral position
(Currently selected circuit #)
●Switch selection
*Up to five rates for each function
[Helicopter/glider]
●Condition selection
●Switch selection
●Condition Mode
selection
●Switch mode
selection
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
129
Dual rate setting procedure
1. Function selection
Move the cursor to the function selection
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Select the function you want to adjust by
scrolling the Push dial.
Push the RTN button to the cursor mode.
2. Switch selection
Move the cursor to the circuit # item and
access the switch setup screen by pushing
the RTN button. Select the switch activation
method and the activation position (if
applicable).
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
3. Left/right (up/down) rate adjustment
*Perform the settings below after changing to the circuit # or
condition you want to adjust.
Move the cursor to the rate item you want to
adjust and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 100%
Adjustment range: 0%~140%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Repeat this procedure for additional rate
and other functions as desired.
4. Operation curve (EXP curve) adjustment
*Perform the settings below after changing to the circuit # or
condition you want to adjust.
Move the cursor to the EXP item you want to
adjust and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
*Using the EXP curve is effective to smooth or soften the
control inputs around center to avoid over-controlling the
model. This is often used for the ailerons, elevator and
rudder and may be used with the throttle in the case of an
airplane selection to smooth the engine controls as well.
Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
Repeat this procedure for all other rates and
functions as desired.
130 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>
5. Neutral position adjustment
*Perform the settings below after changing to the circuit # or
condition you want to adjust.
Move the cursor to the [NT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the neutral
position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to the cursor mode.
PROG. MIX
Program mixing can be freely customized. Up to five mixings can
be used for each model. [All model types]
Programmable mixing may be used to correct
undesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also be
used for unusual control configurations. Mixing means
that the motion of a command channel, called the
"master," is added to the motion of the mixed channel,
called "slave."
You may choose to have the Master's trim added to
the Slave channel response ("Trim" setting). The mixing
curve (Linear/5-point) can be changed. You may select
Mixing ON/OFF switch, control or you may choose to
have mixing remaining on all the time.
The Programmable mixing includes a powerful link
function, which allows Programmable mixing to be
linked with the special mixing functions, or with other
programmable mixing functions. The link function can
be set up for Master and Slave channel individually.
● Select [PROG. MIX] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
RETURN
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
●Mix #
Mix setup screen call
● Move the cursor to the mix # whose function you want to activate
and access the setup screen by pushing the RTN button.
●Mixing rate (Left/right, up/down)
[Linear curve]
●Curve selection
●Current mix No.
●Offset rate(X, Y)
●Switch selection
●ON/OFF
[5-point curve]
●Curve selection
●Point rate (point1-5)
Prog. mix setting procedure
●Activate the function.
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode.
●Slave CH
●Master CH
●Link setting
●Trim mode setting
*The function is activated. (ON or OFF display)
*ON/OFF switch and mix rate are not set even though the
function is activated.
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
131
●ON/OFF switch setting
Move the cursor to the switch item and
access the switch setup screen by pushing
the RTN button and select the switch and ON
direction.
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
*Always on when [--].
●Master channel setting
1. Move the cursor to the [MASTER] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the function by scrolling the Push dial.
*The display blinks.
●Trim mode ON/OFF setting
1. When changing the trim mode, move the
cursor to the [TRIM] item and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select ON/OFF by scrolling the Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to change the trim
mode ON/OFF and return to the cursor
mode.
*To incorporate the mixing from the master trim, select [ON].
If trim is not desired, select [OFF].
*Effective when a function is set in the master channel.
●Linear curve setting
Push the RTN button to change the function
and return to the cursor mode.
2. When you want to link this mixing with other
mixes, move the cursor to the [LINK] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the link mode, either [+] or [-], by
scrolling the Push dial.
[Rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the mixing rate setting
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
Push the RTN button to set the link mode and
return to the cursor mode.
Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for all other rates as
desired.
[Offsetting the curve horizontally in the vertical or horizontal direction]
1. Move the cursor to the [OFFS] setting item
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
Adjust the offset rate by scrolling the Push
dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
*The display blinks.
*Check to ensure that the link mode is functioning properly
by operating the mix accordingly.
*Master channel control can be set to activate based on
the amount of stick input, or VR input, neither of which
includes ATV, D/R, and mixing selection. In this case, the
switch setup screen is displayed by pushing the RTN button
with "H/W" selected in the function selection. Select master
channel control. (To terminate the "H/W" selection, select
the [--] display and push the RTN button.
●Slave channel setting
1. Move the cursor to the [SLAVE] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the function by scrolling the Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to change the function
and return to the cursor mode.
2. When you want to link this mixing with other
mixes, move the cursor to the [LINK] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the link mode to [+] or [-] by scrolling
the Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to set the link mode and
return to the cursor mode.
*Check the direction by actual operation.
132 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for the other direction.
●5-point curve setting
[Rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the point rate setting item
you want to adjust and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point as
desired.
FUEL MIX
Dedicated mixing used to adjust the fuel mixture of applicable
engines. [Airplane/helicopter]
Note: Initial settings do not assign fuel mix to
any channel. Prior to using the Fuel Mix
settings, select an unused channel on your
receiver and assign it accordingly for the
mixture control. Additionally, please make
● Select [FUEL MIX] at the Model menu and
sure that your [Control] and [Trim] are set to
access the setup screen shown below by
pushing the RTN button.
[Airplane type] null [--].
This function is used to refine in-flight needle
adjustments of engines that offer mixture control
carburetors.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
●Needle high trim
selection
●Acceleration setting
[Helicopter type]
●Mixing curve copy function
Move the COPY item and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the copy destination condition by
scrolling the Push dial and push the RTN
button. Select [YES] and push the RTN
button.
●Engine cut setting
<Model Menu (Common Functions)>
133
Setting method
*Before using this function, assign the [FUEL MIX] function
to an unused channel in the Linkage menu [FUNCTION] .
●Activate the function.
1.Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
2.Move the cursor to the [MIX] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the mixing mode you want to change
by scrolling the Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to change the mode
and return to the cursor mode.
*When [MIX] is selected at the [MIX] icon, the throttle curve
data that is set becomes the mix master. When [UNMIX] is
selected, the throttle stick position becomes the master.
●5-point curve setting
1. Move the cursor to the point rate setting item
you want to adjust and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point.
●Needle high trim setting
1.Move the cursor to the needle high trim
selection item and access the switch setup
screen by pushing the RTN button. Select the
needle high trim lever.
*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] at the back of this manual.
2. Move the cursor to the TRIM rate item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the trim rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -30%~+30%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
134 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>
Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
*Needle high trim works as high trim based on the center.
(Works like ATL trim.)
●Acceleration setting (Airplane)
*This function is used to adjust the needle/engine rise
characteristics during acceleration. This enables an
acceleration function which temporarily increases the needle
operation from the throttle stick.
This function is used when there are symptoms of the
mixture being too lean or too rich, which would be
generated by sudden throttle stick inputs.
[Acceleration rate setting (RATE)]
*Acceleration can be adjusted for both high and low settings.
[Damping rate setting (DUMPING)]
*The return time after operation (Dumping) can be set.
Move the cursor to the rate item you want to
change and push the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end adjustment and
return to the cursor mode.
[Operation point setting (ACT POS)]
*The operation point at which the acceleration setting will
occur. If this point is exceeded, acceleration is performed.
Move the cursor to the [ACT POS] item and hold the throttle stick to the position you
want to change. Push the RTN button for one
second.
Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the needle stroke is large, adjust your
settings so there is no binding of your linkage.
●Engine cut setting
*Operation linked with the throttle hold function, throttle cut
function, and idle down function is possible. The throttle
cut position can be adjusted accordingly. Set it to the fully
closed position.
Move the cursor to the throttle cut or idle
down item and push the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode.
Adjust the servo position by scrolling the Push
dial.
Initial value: THR CUT: 17%, IDLE DOWN: 0%
Adjustment range: THR CUT: 0~50%, IDLE
DOWN: 0~100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
MODEL MENU (AIRPLANE/GLIDER FUNCTIONS)
The dedicated mixes, etc. that are applicable
when an airplane or glider model type is selected
are displayed in this Model Menu functions
section. Prior to adjusting any of these mixes, etc.
use the Model Type function in the Linkage menu
to select the model type, wing type, and tail type
matched to the aircraft. Other settings reset the
data used in mixing function, etc.
For gliders, many dedicated mixes can be set
for each flight condition, as required. To switch
the settings for each condition by switch or stick
position, use the Condition Select function to add
flight conditions. (Up to five conditions can be
used.)
Note: The T12K is designed so that the airplane and
glider model types can utilize aircraft of the same
wing type.
The functions common to airplanes and gliders, with
the exception of some dedicated functions, are
written without regard to the model type.
While there may be differences, depending on the
number of servos, etc. the wing type used, etc. the
setup screens in the instruction manual are typical
examples.
● Call the model menu shown below by
pushing and holding the MDL button at the
home screen.
*The Model menu screen depends on
the model type.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Calling setup screen
●To next page
RETURN
● Select the function
you want to set and
access the setup
screen by pushing
the RTN button.
Model Menu functions list
PITCH CURVE
Compatible with VPP (Variable Pitch Propeller)
function. [Airplane, general]
THR CURVE
THR curve function adjusts the throttle operation
curve for optimum engine speed to throttle stick
movement. [Airplane/glider/multirotor, general]
THR DELAY
THR-DELAY function is used to slow the
response of the throttle stick to simulate the slow
response of a turbine engine, etc. [Airplane,
general]
AIL DIFFERENTIAL
The left and right aileron differential can be
adjusted independently. For gliders, the differential
rate in butterfly mixing can be adjusted.
[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
FLAP SETTING
The up/down travel of each flap can be adjusted
independently for each servo according to the wing
type. [Airplane/glider, 2 flaps or more]
AIL to CAMB.FLP
This mix operates the camber flaps in the aileron
mode. It improves the roll axis characteristics.
[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons + 2 flaps or more]
AIL to BRKFLP
This mix operates the brake flaps in the aileron
mode. It improves the roll axis characteristics.
[Glider, 4 flaps]
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
135
AIL to RUD
This mix is used when you want to coordinate
the rudder with aileron operation for banking at
shallow angles. [Airplane/glider, general]
RUD to AIL
This function is used when you want to mix
the ailerons with rudder input. Rudder is applied
during rolling maneuvers such as knife edge
flight. [Airplane/glider, general]
CAMBER MIX
This mix adjusts the camber and corrects the
elevators. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
ELE to CAMBER
This mix is used when you want to mix
camber flaps with elevator to increase the lift of
the model. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]
CAMB.FLP to ELE
This mix is used to correct for changes in
attitude when the camber flaps are utilized.
[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons + 1 flap or more]
BUTTERFLY (Crow)
This function is used to quickly slow the
aircraft and/or reduce the altitude. [Glider, 2
ailerons or more (Flying: 2 ailerons + 1 flap or
more)]
TRIM MIX
The ailerons, elevators, and flaps trim offset
rate can be accessed by selecting a switch or
condition selection as desired. [Glider, 2 ailerons
or more]
necessary when landing or when diving, etc.
during flight. [Airplane, 2 ailerons or more]
GYRO
This is a dedicated mix when a GYA Series
gyro is used. [Airplane/glider/multirotor, general]
V-TAIL
This function incorporates the elevators and
rudder input for use with V-tail models. [Airplane/
glider, V-tail specifications]
AILEVATOR (DUAL ELEVATOR)
This function adjusts the elevators and ailerons
of models with elevator specifications. [Airplane/
glider, ailevator specifications]
WINGLET
This function adjusts the left and right rudders
of winglet models. [Airplane/glider, winglet
specifications]
MOTOR
This function adjusts the operation speed when
the motor of an F5B or other such EP glider is
started by a switch. [Airplane/glider, general]
RUD to ELE
This function is used to correct rolling
maneuvers, such as knife edge flight. [Airplane,
general]
SNAP ROLL
This function selects the snap roll switch and
adjusts the amount of servo input. Servo speed
can also be adjusted. [Airplane general]
FLIGHT MODE
AIRBRAKE
This function is used when airbrakes are
RUDDER 1
Winglet
(at Flying wing)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
(RUDDER 2)
This function selects 5 flight modes.
[Multirotor]
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
AILVATOR
RUDDER
(ELEVATOR 2)
ELEVATOR
(AILERON 5)
ELEVATOR 2
(AILERON 6)
136 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
RUDDER 2
Winglet
(at Flying wing)
PIT CURVE
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general
This function adjusts the pitch curve for VPP
(Variable Pitch Propeller) airplanes.
*Up to 3 conditions can be set.
*The priority increases in condition 1→2→3 order.
● Select [PIT CURVE] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
NOTE: When VPP is not assigned to any
channel, the pitch curve is not displayed in
the model menu. In this case, assign VPP to
any channel on the function screen.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
●Curve rate
●Curve point
Setting method
●VPP condition selection
1.Move the cursor to the # button at the top
right side of the screen and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the VPP condition by scrolling the Push
dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to call the setting screen
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Move the cursor to the switch item and
push the RTN button to access the selection
screen. Select the switch and set its ON
direction.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Set the VPP condition 2 and 3 switch.
*The VPP conditions can also be checked in the HOME
screen.
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: 0%~100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the Push
dial.
Initial value: P1: (0%), P2: 25%, P3: 50%, P4:
75%, P5: (100%)
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5% in front of the
adjoining point
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point.
●5-point curve setting
[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and push the RTN
[Deleting/returning curve point]
Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and push the
RTN button for one second.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
137
THR CURVE
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider/Multirotor, general
This function adjusts the throttle curve for
optimum engine speed from throttle stick input.
*When throttle curve is set to ON when there is no throttle
function; this curve acts as the motor function.
● Select [THR CURVE] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
NOTE: If this throttle curve function is activated,
you cannot use the THR-EXP function within
the DUAL RATE function simultaneously.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
●Curve rate
●Curve point
Setting method
●Activate the function.
1.Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Select the ON mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode.
●5-point curve setting
[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: 0%~100%
item you want to adjust and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the Push
dial.
Initial value: P1: (0%), P2: 25%, P3: 50%, P4:
75%, P5: (100%)
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5% in front of the
adjoining point
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Deleting/returning curve point]
Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and push the
RTN button for one second.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
138 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
THR DELAY
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general
THR-DELAY function is used to slow the
response of the throttle stick to simulate the slow
response of a turbine engine, etc.
*THR DELAY serves the same function as servo speed THR.
Use one or the other, not both. If both are used, the servo
delay could be greater than intended.
● Select [THR DELAY] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
Setting method
●Operation speed (delay) setting
1.Move the cursor to the [DELAY] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the delay rate by scrolling the Push
dial.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
139
AIL DIFF.
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more
The left and right aileron differential can be
adjusted independently.
For gliders, the differential rate in butterfly
mixing can be adjusted.
● Select [AIL DIFF.] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
[Airplane (2A+2F)]
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● Aileron left/right
adjustment
[Glider (4A+2F)]
(Currently selected condition name)
Setting method
●Aileron left/right adjustment
Move the cursor to the aileron (AIL) 1~4 left (or
right) setting item and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the aileron angles by scrolling the Push
dial when the stick is moved to the left (or
right) end.
Initial value: 100%
Adjustment range: 0~120%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
140 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
Aileron Differential Fine Tune
Butterfly Adjust
BUTTERFLY stick operation is 0.
Example of Airplane (2AIL) P.1/2
BUTTERFLY stick operation is 100%.
Actual rate
Example of Airplane (2AIL) P.2/2
It can be set by each condition.
The actual down rate =
(Aileron Differential rate) +
{(100-Aileron Differential
rate) x (Butterfly Adjust rate)}
Operation Mode
When the fine tune control is set, it is
displayed.
Mode : LIN. / ATL+ / ATL- / SYM.
Fine tune control
hardware
The fine tune rate range:
-100 ~ +100%
Example of Glider (4AIL)
P.1/2
The actual up rate = (Aileron
Differential rate) - (Aileron
Differential Butterfly Adjust
rate) x (Aileron Differential
rate)
*When BUTTERFLY ADJUSTMENT RATE is "+", Up rate
is decreased and DOWN rate is increased.
Example of Glider (4AIL)
*When BUTTERFLY ADJUSTMENT RATE is "-", the
calculation method of UP/DOWN and a direction become
reversed.
P.2/2
* W h e n F l y i n g w i n g 2 A I L t y p e , n o B U T T E R F LY
ADJUSTMENT will be displayed. (There is no butterfly
mixing.)
*The start point of BUTTERFLY ADJUSTMENT shifted
from the start point of BUTTERFLY MIXING. Then, it was
corrected.
It can be set by each
flight condition.
[ Fine tuning VR operation mode ]
[LIN.]:Mixing rate 0% at center of VR. When the
VR is turned clockwise and counterclockwise, the mixing rate increases and decreases,
respectively.
[ATL+]:Mixing rate 0% at left end of VR. When
the VR is turned, the mixing rate increases.
[ATL-]:Mixing rate 0% at right end of VR. When
the VR is turned, the mixing rate increases.
[SYM.]:When the VR is turned to the left or right of
the neutral position, the mixing rate increases.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
141
FLAP SET.
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 flaps or more
The up/down travel of each flap (camber flaps:
FLP1/2, brake flaps: FLP3/4) can be adjusted
independently for each servo according to the
wing type.
● The operation reference point of each flap can be
offset
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
The camber flaps of a 4-flap model can
be mixed with the brake flaps. (BRKFLP to
CMBFLP)
● An ON/OFF switch can be set.
● Select [FLAP SET.] at the Model menu and access the setup
screen shown below by pushing the RTN button.
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
RETURN
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
●Up /Down
adjustment
●Operation reference
point offset
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
Setting method
●Flap up/down adjustment
Move the cursor to the flap (FLP) 1~4 Up or
Down item according to the wing type and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode. Adjust the travel independently
by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: +100%
Adjustment range: -120~+120%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●Reference point adjustment
Move the cursor to the [OFFSET] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode. Adjust the operation reference
point of each flap by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the
reference point is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●Activate the Brake FLP to Camber FLP mixing
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
To select a switch, move the cursor to the
[SW] item and push the RTN button to call the
selection screen. Select the switch and set its
ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
142 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
AIL to CMBFLP
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons + 2 flaps or
more
This mix operates the camber flaps (FLP1/2)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick
is manipulated, the ailerons and camber flaps
perform aileron operation simultaneously to
significantly improve the roll axis.
● The aileron left/right mixing rate of each flap servo
can be independently adjusted.
● An ON/OFF switch can be set.
● Linking is possible: Link this mix to other mixes.
● Select [AIL to CMBFLP] at the Model
menu and access the setup screen
shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
● Adjustment of each
flap servo
Setting method
●Activate the function
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
When selecting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and push the RTN button to call
the selection screen. Select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -120~+120%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●Link mode setting
When linking a mix, move the cursor to the
[LINK] item and push the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Select the ON mode
by scrolling the Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to set the link mode and
return to the cursor mode.
●Mixing rate adjustment
Move the cursor to the flap (FLP) 1~2 left
or right item according to the wing type
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Adjust the mixing rate
independently by scrolling the Push dial.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
143
AIL to BRAKEFLP
[Corresponding model type]: Glider, 4 flaps
This mix operates the brake flaps (FLP3/4)
in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick is
manipulated, the aileron and brake flaps perform
the aileron operation simultaneously and the roll
axis is improved.
● The aileron left and right mixing rates can be
adjusted separately for each flap servo.
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.
● Select [AIL to BRKFLP] at the Model
menu and access the setup screen
shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
FLP 3
(Brake Flap)
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
FLP 4
(Brake Flap)
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
(Currently selected condition name)
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
● Adjustment of each
flap servo
Setting method
●Activate the function
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor
to the [SW] item and push the RTN button
to access the selection screen. Select the
switch and set its ON direction. (Always ON
at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -120~+120%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●Link mode setting
To activate the mixing, move the cursor to
the [LINK] item and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode. Select the
ON mode by scrolling the Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to set the link mode and
return to the cursor mode.
●Mixing rate adjustment
Move the cursor to the flap (FLP) 3~4 left or
right item and push the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Adjust the mixing
rate independently by scrolling the Push dial.
144 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
AIL to RUD
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general
Use this mix when you want to mix the rudders
with aileron operation. This allows the aircraft to
bank at a steep angle.
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by a
switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● The mixing rate can be adjusted.
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 1
Winglet
at Flying wing
(
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 2
Winglet
at Flying wing
(
)
)
V-TAIL
● Select [AIL to RUD] at the Model
menu and access the setup
screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
RUDDER 2
RUDDER
RUDDER
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
*The display screen is an example.
The actual screen depends on the
model type.
Setting method
reset to the initial value.)
●Activate the function
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●Fine tuning
*The display blinks.
Actual rate
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
When selecting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and push the RTN button to call
the selection screen. Select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
It can be set by each conditions.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
●Mixing rate adjustment
Move the cursor to the left or right item
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Adjust the mixing rate
independently by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100~+100%
Operation Mode
When the fine tune control is set, it is
displayed.
Mode : LIN. / ATL+ / ATL- / SYM.
The fine tune control
hardware
The fine tune rate
Range:-100 ~ +100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
145
RUD to AIL
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general
This function is used when you want to mix
the ailerons with rudder input. It is used when
rudder is applied during roll maneuvers, such
as knife edge flight. It can be used to turn or
bank scale models, large models, etc. like a fullsize aircraft.
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● Linking can be set: Link this mix to other mixes.
● The mixing rate can also be adjusted.
● A five-point curve can be set at airplane model
type.
(
AIL1
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 1
Winglet
at Flying wing
)
(
)
V-TAIL
RUDDER 2
● Select [RUD to AIL] at the Model
menu and access the setup screen
shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 2
Winglet
at Flying wing
RUDDER
RUDDER
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
*The display screen is an example.
The actual screen depends on the
model type.
Setting method
●Activate the function
●Mixing rate adjustment (glider)
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
Move the cursor to the left or right item
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Adjust the mixing rate
independently by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100~+100%
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and push the RTN button to call
the selection screen. Select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●Link mode setting
To activate the link mixing, move the cursor
to the [LINK] item and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Select the
ON mode by scrolling the Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to set the link mode and
return to the cursor mode.
146 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
●5-point curve setting (airplane)
[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item (left side) you want to adjust and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the Push
dial.
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5% in front of the
adjoining point
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Deleting/returning curve point]
Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and push the
RTN button for one second.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
147
CAMBER MIX
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more
This function adjusts the rate of camber
operation for the wing camber (ailerons, camber
flaps, brake flaps) in the negative and positive
directions. The aileron, flap, and elevator rates
can also be adjusted independently and attitude
changes caused by camber operation can be
corrected.
● Select [CAMBER MIX] at the Model
menu and access the setup screen
shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
*Initial setting assigns camber operation to side lever LS.
● The up/down rates of the aileron, flap, and
elevator servos can be adjusted. When the mixing
direction is reversed by the linkage, adjustments
can be made by changing the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● A condition delay can be set. A cut switch which
can turn OFF the delay function can be set.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
●Condition delay
setting
●Condition delay
cut switch
(Glider: Currently selected
condition name)
●Aileron rate
adjustment
●Flap rate
adjustment
●Elevator rate
adjustment
148 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
Setting method
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
●Activate the function
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and push the RTN button to call
the selection screen. Select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●3 Camber points
A button for setting 3 Camber
points.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
●Condition delay setting
The screen at Airplane
Move the cursor to the [COND.DELAY] item
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Adjust the condition delay
by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
The screen at Glider
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
When setting a cut switch, move the cursor
to the [CUT-SW] item and push the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Select
the switch and set its ON direction. (Always
ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
3 points setting of Camber function
●Rate adjustment
The rates are adjusted by accessing the
aileron, flap, and elevator rate screens.
Move the cursor to the rate1 or rate2
item and push the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Adjust the rate
independently by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100~+100%
FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
(Chip Aileron)
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
AILEVATOR
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
149
ELE to CAMBER
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more
This function is used when you want to mix the
camber flaps with elevator operation. When used,
the flaps are lowered by up elevator, and lift is
increased.
● Select [ELE to CAMBER] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown below
by pushing the RTN button.
● In-flight mixing can be turned ON/OFF by assigning
this to a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● The mixing rate can be adjusted.
● The point that has little effect near the neutral
position of the elevator stick can be adjusted.
(Glider only)
Note: The elevator on the tailless wing will also
be affected when this mix is activated.
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
*The display screen is an example.
The actual screen depends on the
model type.
●Mixing rate adjustment
Move the cursor to the up or down mixing
rate item for each servo and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate independently by scrolling
the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Setting method
●Activate the function
●Range setting (Glider only)
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
Move the cursor to the [RANGE] item and
hold the elevator stick to the desired position
(upper or lower side) and then push the RTN
button for one second to set the range.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and push the RTN button to call
the selection screen. Select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
*The mixing does not work near neutral of the elevator stick.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: 0~100%
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
150 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
CMBFLP to ELE
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider,
2 ailerons + 1 flap or more
When the camber/speed flaps are utilized,
the aircraft might experience a change in pitch.
This mix compensates for such changes by
incorporating elevator input.
FLP 1
(Camber Flap)
● The elevator servos' up/down rates can be
adjusted separately. If the mixing direction is
reversed, change the mixing rate polarity (+ or –).
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
AILEVATOR
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
ELEVATOR 2
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
● Select [CMBFLP to ELE] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
*The display screen is an
example. The actual screen
depends on the model type.
●Elevator rate
adjustment
Setting method
●Activate the function
●Mixing rate adjustment
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
Move the cursor to the RATE1 or RATE2 item
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Adjust the mixing rate
independently by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -120~+120%
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and push the RTN button to call
the selection screen. Select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
151
Camber FLP to ELE ModeA ModeB
3 points curve mixing similar to D/R is added to Camber FLP
to ELE mixing function. It is an easy way to set the amount of
moving ELE when FLP is down.
◆ Mode A ・・・ Compatible to conventional 2 rates mixing.
◆ Mode B ・・・ 3 Points curve mixing.
【Mode A】(Compatible to conventional 2 rates mixing.)
・The master of this mixing is output of Camber FLAP D/R.
Mixing rate
Range : -120 ~ +120%
The rate which is
operating is shown.
If operational mode is changed, a mixing
rate will become an initial value (0%).
【Mode B】(3 Points curve mixing )
・ The master of this mixing is the control hardware of Camber
FLAP.
The rate which is operating is shown. Two ↓
may be displayed when the lever and the dial
are set to operation of a camber flap. In that
case, it operates linearly between rates with ↓
display.
If operational mode is changed, a mixing
rate will become an initial value (0%).
The amount of ELE
operations
+100%
0%
-100%
RATE 1
RATE 2
RATE 3
FLP operative position
152 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
The image of each
rate of operation
It operates as curve
mixing of three
points according
to the operative
position of the flap.
BUTTERFLY
[Corresponding model type]: Glider, Normal: 2 ailerons or more
Flying: 2 ailerons + 1 flap or more
This function is utilized to quickly slow the
aircraft and reduce altitude by simultaneously
raising the left and right ailerons and lowering the
flaps (camber flap, brake flap).
Butterfly (Crow) produces an extremely
efficient landing configuration by accomplishing
the following:
1. Slow the aircraft’s velocity.
2. Provide washout at the wing tips to reduce
the tendency to tip stall.
● Select [BUTTERFLY] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
3. C reate more lift toward the center of the
wing, allowing it to fly at a slower speed
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● The butterfly operation reference point can be
offset.
● The operational speed of the ailerons and flaps
can be adjusted.
● The differential rate can be adjusted.
*For a description of the setting method, see the aileron
differential function.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
(Currently selected condition name)
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
●Aileron/flap rate
adjustment
FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
(Chip Aileron)
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
●Elevator adjustment
AILEVATOR
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
● Mode A (Normal)
The butterfly operation direction is reversed
at the neutral position (50%) of the throttle
stick.
● Mode B (Throttle stick full stroke MODE)
It does not reverse at the neutral position,
so you can set the butterfly operation start
point with the full stroke of the throttle stick.
●Butterfly operation reference point
● Servo speed setting
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
153
Setting method
Offset point
●Activate the function
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
*The display blinks.
2- Intermediate point
1- End point
Output (Y)
Fixed (0)
Settable
Settable
Position (X)
Fixed (offset
position)
Settable
Fixed
* The range where mixing does not work close to the neutral
position of the elevator stick can be adjusted. (Glider only)
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and push the RTN button to call
the selection screen. Select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
●Rate adjustment
*When offset is set, the curve is initialized.
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or
elevator rate item and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust the
rate independently by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -200~+200% (Elevator: -120~+120%)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
● Elevator compensation curve adjustment
●Fine tune
The fine
tune control
hardware
●Reference point adjustment
Move the cursor to the [OFFSET] item and
hold the airbrake stick to the desired position.
Then, push the RTN button for one second to
set the butterfly operational reference point.
Initial value: 15% (upper side)
Adjustment range: 0~100%
●Servo speed setting
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or
elevator speed item and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode.
Operation Mode
When the fine tune control is set, it is
displayed.
Mode : LIN. / ATL+ / ATL- / SYM.
The fine tune rate
Range:-100 ~
+100%
Actual rate
Fine Tune Control
*When Flying wing type, it was made not to display
BUTTERFLY ELE. (There is no elevator rate setting .)
154 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
TRIM MIX
[Corresponding model type]: Glider, 2 ailerons or more
This function adjusts the trim offset rates of the
ailerons, elevators, rudder and flaps (camber flaps,
brake flaps) according to the flight status.
As an example this function can be set up for
launching, with speed flaps and ailerons drooped,
and a slight amount of up elevator. It can also be
used for high speed flying, with both ailerons and
speed flaps reflexed slightly, and a bit of down
elevator.
To prevent sudden trim changes when switching
flight conditions, a delay can be set to provide a
● Select [TRIM MIX] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
smooth transition between the two conditions. It
is also possible to program a cut switch, which
will turn off the delay.
Furthermore, you can set the auto switch, which
will link the trim mix to a stick, switch, or dial.
Additionally, the speed of the aileron, elevator,
rudder, and flap servos can be adjusted.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.
(Currently selected condition name)
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● Ailerons, flaps, elevators
and rudder offset rate
●Switch
selection
● Ailerons, flaps, elevators
and rudder servo
speed setting
● Condition delay
setting
●Auto switch selection
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
155
Setting method
●Activate the function
Adjustment range: 0~27
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the switch item and push the RTN button
to access the selection screen. Select the
switch and set its ON direction. (Always ON
at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
●Trim offset rate adjustment
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or
elevator rate item and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust the
rate independently by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -250~+250%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●Condition delay setting
Move the cursor to the [COND.DELAY] item
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode. Adjust the condition delay
by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the servo
operation position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
When setting a cut switch, move the cursor
to the [CUT-SW] item and push the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Select
the switch and set its ON direction. (Always
ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
●Servo speed setting
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or
elevator speed item and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode.
●Auto switch selection
When selecting an auto switch, move the
cursor to the [AUTO-SW] item and push the
RTN button to access the selection screen.
Select the switch and set its ON direction.
(Always ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)
(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)
(Chip Aileron)
V-TAIL
ELEVATOR
ELEVATOR 2
AILEVATOR
ELEVATOR
156 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
ELEVATOR 2
AIRBRAKE
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, 2 ailerons or more
This function is used to increase the aircraft's
drag and is useful for landing or diving, etc.
The preset ailerons, elevators, rudder and flaps
(camber flap, brake flap) offset amount can be
activated by a switch.
The offset amount of the aileron, elevator,
rudder and flap servos can be adjusted as needed.
Also, the speed of the aileron, elevator, rudder
and flap servos can be adjusted. If the Auto Mode
is activated, this will link the Airbrake to a stick,
switch, or dial. A separate stick switch or dial can
also be set as the ON/OFF switch.
Setting example for F3A and other flaperon specifications
(When 2 ailerons model type selected)
Offset rate:
AIL: [-35~-45%], AIL2: [-35~-45%], ELE: [+5~7%]
Note: The input numerics are examples. Adjust the travel to
match the aircraft.
Mode setting:
ACT: [ON]
Switch: [SW-C]
AUTO-SW: [--]
● Select [AIRBRAKE] at the Model menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
*The display screen is an example. The
actual screen depends on the model type.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● Ailerons, flaps, rudder and
elevators offset rate
●Switch
selection
● Ailerons, flaps, rudder
and elevators servo
speed setting
●Auto switch selection
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
157
Setting method
●Activate the function
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
●Linear mode
In Linear Mode, Airbrake is operated by the
stick or lever.
The start point of the mixing can be set.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
When setting a switch, move the cursor to
the switch item and push the RTN button
to access the selection screen. Select the
switch and set its ON direction. (Always ON
at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
●Offset rate adjustment
Operated by the
stick or lever
Mode button
OFS : Offset mode
LIN : Linear mode
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap, rudder or
elevator rate item and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Adjust the
rate independently by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -250~+250%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●Servo speed setting
Move the cursor to the aileron, flap, rudder
or elevator speed item and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
The screen of Offset mode
The start point this mixer is set.
< > is current position of MASTER.
At J1, J4, LD and RD, the left end
point is 0%, the right end point is
100%.
At J2, J3, LS, RS and SA~SH, the
upper end point is 100%, the lower
end point is 0%
The operation hardware is set.
The default setting is below;
Stick Mode 1 : J2
Stick Mode 2 : J3
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
e.g. Start point
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
●Auto switch selection
When setting a auto switch, move the cursor
to the [AUTO-SW] item and push the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Select
the switch and set its ON direction. (Always
ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Air brake moves in
linear
J3: < 50% >
Airbrake
doesn't move.
Low side
158 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
Airbrake moves
GYRO
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider/Multirotor, general
This function is used when a GYA Series gyro
is used to stabilize the aircraft's attitude. The
sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/
AVCS mode) can be changed via a switch.
● Three rates (Rate1/Rate2/Rate3) can be switched.
● Up to 3 axes (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3) can be
simultaneously controlled.
● Select [GYRO] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below
by pushing the RTN button.
[Rate 1 setup screen]
Note: This setting does not assign a sensitivity
channel. To do so, use the Linkage menu
prior to assigning the sensitivity channel
(Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3). Be sure to select an
unused channel.
Set the [Control] and [Trim] settings other than
Function to [--].
(Active rate # display)
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
● R a t e 1 - 3 s e t u p
screen selection
● G y r o t y p e
selection
● ACT/INH
● Switch selection
[Rate 2 setup screen]
● The operation mode (AVCS/
NOR) and sensitivity of the
three axis Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3
can be set.
●The fine tuning hardware
setting
Setting range:
GY type : Setting rate ±20% (The
actual rate has not to be
greater than 100%.)
NORM type : Setting rate ±10.0% (The
actual rate has not to be greater
than 100%.)
[Rate 3 setup screen]
Setting method
*Prior to using the Function menu in the Linkage menu to
assign the sensitivity channel (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3), select an
unused channel.
Set [Control] and [Trim] other than function to [--].
●Rate 1-3 setup screen selection
Move the cursor to the setup screen selection
item and push the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Select the setup
screen # by scrolling the Push dial.
Push the RTN button to change the setup
screen and return to the cursor mode.
●Activate the function
Move the cursor to the [INH] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
159
When setting a rate selection switch, move
the cursor to the switch item and push the
RTN button to access the selection screen.
Select the switch and set its ON direction.
(Always ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
●Gyro type selection
Move the cursor to the gyro type selection
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode. Select the gyro type
by scrolling the Push dial.
[GY]: When a Futaba GYA gyro is used
[NORM]: When using something other than
Futaba GYA gyro is used.
Push the RTN button to change the gyro type
and return to the cursor mode.
*When a Futaba GYA gyro is used and [GY] type is selected,
the sensitivity set value is directly read in both AVCS and
NORM modes.
selection item and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode. Select the
operation mode by scrolling the Push dial.
[AVCS]: AVCS mode
[NORM]: Normal mode
Push the RTN button to change the operation
mode and return to the cursor mode.
●Sensitivity setting
Move the cursor to the sensitivity icon and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the sensitivity by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: 0~100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the
sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
●Operation mode selection (GYA gyro)
Move the cursor to the operation mode
(Example) Setting three axis using a GYA440 and GYA441 (2)
● Wing type: 2 fuselage-mounted aileron servos selected.
● Set 5CH → GYRO (GYA441AIL), 7CH → GYRO2 (GYA441ELE), 8CH → GYRO3 (GYA440RUD), CTRL
and TRIM → [--] : at the Function menu of the Linkage menu.
● GYRO setting of the Model menu.
Rate
#1
#2
#3
GYRO
GYRO 2
GYRO 3
AVCS : 60% AVCS : 60% AVCS : 60%
TYPE
GY
NORM : 60% NORM : 60% NORM : 60%
GY
ACT/INH
OFF/ON
INH
ON/OFF
SW
SE
SE
*Set so that Rate 1 is turned on at the back position of switch E and Rate 3 is turned ON at the front position. Since
switch E is turned OFF at the center, Rate 2 remains [INH].
AVCS
GAIN 0%
NORMAL
Receiver
When AVCS is used, we
recommend that the
sensitivity CH be set to
the 3-position.
GYA441
S.BUS/S.BUS2 port
GYA441
GYA440
Aileron servo
Elevator servo
Rudder servo
160 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
V-TAIL
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, V-tail
This function enables adjustments for left and
right rudder angle changes during elevator and
rudder operation of a V-tail airplane.
V-tail is when two servos are used together to
control rudder movement as elevators. In addition
to each elevator side moving up and down together,
each side moves in opposite directions when moving
as rudders. On a V-tail, this is also known as a
Ruddervator, as they serve the same purpose.
ELEVATOR
(RUDDER 2)
RUDDER
(ELEVATOR 2)
● Select [V-TAIL] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below
by pushing the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
(Elevator function)
Up and down travel adjustment of
elevator operation
(Rudder function)
Left and right travel
adjustment of rudder
operation
Setting method
● Travel adjustment
Move the cursor to the item you want to
adjust and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: +50%
Adjustment range: -120~+120%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
*If the mixing direction is reversed, adjustments can be made
by changing the mixing rate polarity (+ or -).
*If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out of
travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
161
AILEVATOR
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Ailevator
(Effective only when 2 servos used at the elevators)
This function improves the performance of the roll
axis by operating the elevators as ailerons.
Ailevator is where each elevator in a standard
(conventional) or v-tail moves independently, like
ailerons on a wing. In addition to each elevator side
moving up and down together, each side moves in
opposite directions when moving as an Ailevator. On
a V-tail, this is also known as a Ruddervator, as they
can serve the same purpose. Typically, both Ailevator
and ailerons are coupled together to maximize roll
performance, especially on larger wingspan planes.
ELEVATOR
(AILERON 5)
ELEVATOR 2
(AILERON 6)
Note: Select Ailevator as the Model Type at the Model
Type screen. This changes the output channel. Check
the Function menu.
● Select [AILEVATOR] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
(Elevator function)
● The up and down rate of both
elevators when the elevator stick
is moved can be individually
adjusted.
(Aileron function)
● When the elevators are used
as ailerons, aileron travel of
the left and right elevators
can be adjusted.
Setting method
● Travel adjustment
Move the cursor to the item you want to
adjust and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: ELE: +100%, AIL: 0%
Adjustment range: -120~+120%
*If the mixing direction is reversed, adjustments can be made
by changing the mixing rate polarity (+ or -).
*If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are
moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out of
travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
162 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
WINGLET
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Flying wing only
This function adjusts the left and right rudder
angles of airplanes with winglets.
Winglets are used to improve the efficiency of
aircraft by lowering the lift-induced drag caused by
wingtip vortices. The winglet is a vertical or angled
extension located at the tip of each wing.
Winglets work by increasing the wing's effective
aspect ratio without adding to the structural
stress and weight of its structure. An extension of
wingspan would also permit lowering of induced
drag, though it requires boosting the wing's
strength and weight. A winglet helps solve this
by effectively increasing the aspect ratio without
adding to the wingspan.
RUDDER 1
Winglet
at Flying wing
(
)
RUDDER 2
Winglet
(at Flying
wing )
● Select [WINGLET] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
(Rudder 1/2)
● The travel during rudder stick operation
can be individually adjusted.
Setting method
● Travel adjustment
Move the cursor to the item you want to
adjust and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: +100%
Adjustment range: -120~+120%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
*If the mixing direction is reversed, change the mixing rate
polarity (+ or -).
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
163
MOTOR
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general
This function lets you set the speed when the
motor of an F5B or other EP glider is started via
a switch. The operation speed can be set for two
ranges, slow speed flight and high speed flight
(Speed1/Speed2). This function can also be
operated as a safety function by programming it to
a switch.
● The In side and Out side operating speeds can
be adjusted independently in 2 ranges (Speed1/
Speed2).
● The boundary between the 2 ranges can be set.
(From Speed1 to Speed2)
● The operational speed can only be activated at
the initial operation. However, operation can be
repeated by setting the switch to OFF before the
operation is finished. When you want to reset, one
● Select [MOTOR] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
time operation, set the ACT/INH item to [INH] and
then reset it to [ON].
● The motor channel is controlled by SW-G. (Glider:
Initial setting) When changing the switch or stick
which controls the motor, first change Function of
the Linkage menu.
● If the Model Type selected is Airplane, the MOTOR
function is changed from INH to ON and it is not
assigned to another channel. The changes from
the throttle channel to the motor channel are
enabled.
Note: Initial setting does not assign a motor
channel according to the model type. Prior to
assigning the motor channel, find an unused
channel. Then, use the Function menu of the
Linkage menu.
Set [Control] to the switch you want to use
and [Trim] to [--].
Note: When using this function, always check
the initial operation with the propeller
removed.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
Setting method
● Activate the function
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [ACT/INH] item and push the RTN button
to switch to the data input mode. Select the
[ACT] by scrolling the Push dial and push the
RTN button.
When selecting the ON/OFF switch, move the
cursor to the switch item and push the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Select
the switch and set its ON direction. (Always
ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
The screen graph display OFF direction also
changes.
Note:
● First decide the motor OFF direction, and then
set the speed. When you want to reset the
motor OFF direction, also reset the speed.
● We recommend that Motor OFF be set in
combination with F/S.
● Set the basic operation direction with the
Reverse function to match the ESC used.
● Always set the Motor OFF position.
● Motor off position setting
Move the cursor to the [MOTOR OFF] item
and push the RTN button for one second
when the motor function switch (SG, etc.) is in
the MOTOR OFF position you want to set. The
direction of the motor switch is memorized.
164 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
●Start switch function
● ON/OFF direction
Setting method
● Motor function switch
current position
● Activate the motor speed function
When using motor speed function, move the
cursor to the [INH] item and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the [ACT] by scrolling the Push dial
and push the RTN button.
● Sifting the boundary between the 2 ranges
Move the cursor to the [SPEED1>2] item and push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the boundary position by scrolling the
Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
● Operation speed adjustment
Move the cursor to the [IN] (on to off) or [OUT]
(off to on) item and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the operation speed you want to set
by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27
When active, the "START SW" allows the
motor's state to change from OFF to ON. The
motor is ON when the main SW and "START
SW" are turned ON simultaneously. The motor
changes to OFF only when the main SW is
turned off. If "START SW" is turned OFF but the
main SW is still ON, the motor remains ON.
[START SW function example]
When the throttle (motor) stick is assigned as the "START SW",
and the low throttle position of the throttle curve is adjusted, the
motor starts operating with the initial stick movement. The motor
will not cease functionality even if the stick position is returned to
its lowest setting.
●Trim effect / invalid setting in motor OFF
If one of the trim levers is assigned to the
Motor function, it is possible to turn the
motor off with the trim lever. To maintain
compatibility after updating the T12K, the
trim setting is adjusted to the on position.
However, it is suggested to return it to the off
position accordingly in the programming of
the transmitter.
*Data Reset will return the trim setting to the off position.
●Screen at the time of the motor OFF setting
When the MOTOR OFF setting is highlighted,
you will note the presence of the small cursor
that indicates the MOTOR OFF position. To
adjust this MOTOR OFF position, use the
throttle stick to move the cursor accordingly.
When satisfied with this position, push and
hold the RTN button on the transmitter.
*The larger cursor is used to indicate the output of the motor
channel. This cursor reflects any throttle curves and motor
mixing which may be active.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
● Set/Reset the one time operation
Move the cursor to the [ONE TIME] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the [ACT] by scrolling the Push dial
and push the RTN button to set the ONE TIME
operation.
*When you want to reset ONE TIME operation, set the ACT/
INH item to [INH] and then reset it to [ON].
●Throttle curve button
When "CURVE" button is chosen, a throttle
curve screen opens.
*When a throttle function is assigned to either channel, the
"CURVE" button is not displayed because a throttle curve
does not function as a motor curve.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
165
RUD to ELE
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general
This function is used when you want to mix
elevator operation with rudder operation. It is used
to correct undesirable tendencies when rudder is
applied in rolling maneuvers such as knife edge
flight.
● Mixing during flight can be turned ON/OFF by
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)
● Link mixing can be set: Links this mix to other mixes.
● Select [RUD to ELE] at the Model
menu and access the setup screen
shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
Setting method
●Activate the function
Move the cursor to the [ACT] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the ACT mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the function
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
When selecting a switch, move the cursor to
the [SW] item and push the RTN button to call
the selection screen. Select the switch and
set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
●5-point curve setting (airplane)
[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item (left side) you want to adjust and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the Push
dial.
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5% in front of the
adjoining point
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point.
[Deleting/returning curve point]
Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and push the
RTN button for one second.
●Link mode setting
When selecting the link mixing, move the
cursor to the [LINK] item and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the ON mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to set the link mode and
return to the cursor mode.
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point.
166 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
SNAP ROLL
[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general
This function selects the switch and rate
adjustment of ailerons, elevators, and rudder when
a snap roll is performed.
● Four snap roll directions can be set. (Right/up,
right/down, left/up, left/down)
● Operation mode: When [Master] mode is selected,
the Snap Roll function is turned ON/OFF by the
master switch. It is possible to set the direction
switch to the direction in which you want to snap
roll. When [Single] mode is selected, the snap roll
in each direction can be executed by means of
independent switches and positions.
● A safety switch can be set to prevent the
accidental activation of the snap roll. For
example, the landing gear is lowered, even if
the switch is turned on accidentally the snap roll
would not be executed. The snap roll switch is
activated only when the safety switch is OFF.
(Example) Setting example for F3A
● Mode: [Master]
● Safety SW: [SG] (Safety measure)
● Master SW: [SH] (Main switch for executing
snap roll)
● Direction switches:
*The snap roll up side left and right and down side left and right
direction switches are selected here.
Right/Up: OFF [SD]
Right/Down: OFF [SD]
Left/Up: OFF [SA]
Left/Down: OFF [SA]
● Select [SNAP ROLL] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
RETURN
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
● Master/single mode
selection
● Direction switches
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
167
Setting method
●Master/single mode selection
Move the cursor to the [MODE] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode. Select the master or single
mode by scrolling the Push dial.
*The display blinks.
[MASTER]: Master mode
[SINGLE]: Single mode
Push the RTN button to select the mode and
return to the cursor mode.
When setting a master switch, move the
cursor to the [MASTER-SW] item and push the
RTN button to access the selection screen.
Select the switch and set its ON direction.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
When setting a safety switch, move the
cursor to the [SAFETY-SW] item and push the
RTN button to access the selection screen.
Select the switch and set its ON direction.
●Direction switch selection
Move the cursor to the direction switch
item and push the RTN button to access the
selection screen. Select the switch and set its
ON direction.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
●Rate adjustment
Move the cursor to the aileron, elevator or
rudder item for each direction and push the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate independently by scrolling
the Push dial.
Initial value: (Dependent upon the snap roll
direction)
Adjustment range: -150~+150%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
168 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
FLT. MODE
[Corresponding model type]: Multirotor
In the FLT. MODE (flight mode), you can
change the multicopter mode to up to 3 CH, 5
signals set with any switch. It is used in the case of
a multicopter controller of the type that can change
the flight mode.
● Select [FLT. MODE] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
● It is possible to set 3 functions of "MODE" "MODE2"
"MODE3".
● Five types of flight mode settings are possible for
each function.
● The setting range is -150% (about 890 µS) to + 150%
(about 2150 µS)
● The priority of the flight mode is
FM 1 <FM2 <FM3 <FM4 <FM5
● It will not work if any function of "MODE" "MODE2"
"MODE3" is not set.
●ACT/INH
ON during operation
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
Priority Low
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
Priority High
●Set the flight mode
selection switch. When
FM2 to FM5 are all OFF,
FM1 is selected.
● MODE
●Switch selection
● MODE2
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -150% 〜 150%
● MODE3
● Select [FUNCTION] at the Linkage menu and access the
setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN button.
●Assign MODE to the
channel to be used for
flight mode in advance.
Setting method
●Function setting
Assign the channel to be used with the
function of the linkage menu(MODE/
MODE2/MODE3).
●Rate adjustment
Move the cursor to the FM1-FM5/MODEMODE3 item for each direction and push the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate independently by scrolling
the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -150~+150%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●Switch selection
Move the cursor to the switch item and
push the RTN button to access the selection
screen. Select the switch and set its ON
direction.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider/Multirotor Functions)>
169
MODEL MENU (HELICOPTER)
This section contains information on helicopteronly commands. For instructions on Airplanes and
Gliders, refer to the sections pertaining to those
aircraft.
Use the Model Type function in the Linkage
Menu to select the swash type matched to the
respective aircraft.
Also, activate/deactivate flight conditions
according to your model. To do so, access the
Condition Select screen prior to adjusting the
model's parameters. (Up to five conditions can be
used)
The Dual Rate function and other functions
common to all model types have already been
described elsewhere in this manual. Please refer to
these respective sections for information on how to
do so.
● Call the model menu shown below by long
pushing the MDL button at the home screen,
etc.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Calling setup screen
RETURN
●To next page
● Select the function you
want to set and access
the setup screen by
pushing the RTN button.
Model Menu functions (helicopter) list
PIT CURVE: Adjusts pitch settings in different flight conditions.
THR CURVE: Throttle curve and hovering trim adjustment in different flight conditions.
THR HOLD: Moves the throttle to idle during auto-rotation.
SWASH MIX: Compensates control response in different flight conditions.
THROTTLE MIX: Compensates for power loss when cyclic is applied.
PIT to NEEDLE: Adjusts pitch response in different flight conditions.
PIT to RUD: Compensates torque changes from pitch angle inputs.
GYRO: Used to switch gyro sensitivity.
GOVERNOR: Used to switch RPM of the helicopter’s head.
170 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
PIT CURVE/PIT TRIM
Pitch Curve
This function adjusts the pitch operation curve
for each flight condition to optimize the model's
performance in relationship to the throttle stick position.
● Select [PIT CURVE] at the Model menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the
RTN button.
*A simple curve can be created by reducing the number of
input points to two or three, and then entering the specified
value at the corresponding points.
(Currently selected condition name)
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● curve rate
Setting method
● curve point
●5-point curve setting
[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: P1: -100%, P2: -50%, P3: 0%, P4:
+50%, P5: +100%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point as
desired.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the Push
dial.
Initial value: P1: (0%), P2: 25%, P3: 50%, P4:
75%, P5: (100%)
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5% in front of the
adjoining point
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point as
desired.
[Deleting/returning curve point]
*The graph display includes the pitch
trim operation.
● Pitch curve copy
1.Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and push the
RTN button for one second.
●Pitch curve copy function
Move the cursor to COPY and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the copy destination condition by
scrolling the Push dial and push the RTN
button. Select the [YES] and push the RTN
button.
Normal curve adjustment
*For normal curve, create a basic pitch curve centered
about hovering. Use this function together with the THR
Curve (Normal) function and adjust the curve so that up/
down control is best at a constant engine speed.
Idle up curve adjustment
*For the high side pitch curve, set the maximum pitch
so that it does not overload the engine. For the low side
pitch curve, create curves matched to loop, roll, 3D, and
other purposes and use the idle up curves according to the
performance.
Throttle hold curve adjustment
*The throttle hold curve is used when executing auto
rotations.
Operation precautions
Warning
When starting the engine and flying, always
set the idle up condition switch to OFF and
start the engine at idle.
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
171
Curve setting examples
The screens shown below are curves created by
entering the pitch rate at low, center, and high side (3
points or 5 points) at each condition.
When creating a curve, input the rate specified
by the model (or the reference value).
●Pitch Curve (Example)
Normal Curve
Idle-up 1 Curve
Idle-up 2 Curve
Hold Curve
Pitch Trim (Hovering pitch, high pitch, low pitch)
[Hovering pitch trim setting]
Hovering pitch trim
Setting method
The Hovering Pitch trim function trims the
pitch near the hovering point. Normally, it is
used with the hovering condition. The hovering
pitch can be fine tuned, for changes in rotor speed
accompanying changes in temperature, humidity,
and other flight conditions. Adjust the hovering
pitch so that rotor speed is constant. This function
can be used together with the Hovering Throttle
Trim function for more precise operation.
● Set the function to ACT [ON]. (initial setting)
● Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: LD (initial setting)
● The trim operation mode (Mode: CTRM/
NORM) can be selected.
CTRM mode: Maximum amount of change
near center by center trim operation
(recommended)
NORM mode: Normal trim (parallel
movement trim) operation. The advantage
of using this mode is that the hovering pitch
can be adjusted without changing the
curve.
● The trim rate can be adjusted and the
operation direction can be changed.
● Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
When this value is made small, trim can only
be used near the center.
172 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
[Low/High pitch trim setting]
High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim
Setting method
High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim is the pitch servo's
high side and low side trim function.
● Set the function to ACT (ON).
● Select the adjustment knobs.
Selection example: LS (high side), RS (low
side)
● The trim rate can be adjusted and the
operation direction can be changed.
● Trim acts as high side or low side trim with the
center as the standard.
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
173
THR CURVE/THROTTLE HOVER TRIM
Throttle Curve
Throttle curve function adjusts the throttle
operation curve for each condition to optimize the
engine speed to throttle stick movement.
The Throttle Hover function trims the throttle
near the hovering point. Normally, use it with
hovering conditions. Changes in rotor speed
● Select [THR CURVE] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by
pushing the RTN button.
accompanying changes in the temperature,
humidity, and other flight conditions can be
trimmed. Adjust the throttle so that rotor rotation is
most stable. More precise trimming is also possible
by using this function along with the Hover Pitch
function.
(Currently selected condition name)
*The graph display includes the throttle
hover trim operation.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
● curve rate
● curve point
Setting method
●5-point curve setting
[Curve rate setting]
1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: P1: 0%, P2: 25%, P3: 50%, P4: 75%,
P5: 100%
Adjustment range: 0%~100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point as
desired.
[Moving curve point]
1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to adjust and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the curve point by scrolling the Push
dial.
Initial value: P1: (0%), P2: 25%, P3: 50%, P4:
75%, P5: (100%)
Adjustment range: Up to 2.5% in front of the
adjoining point
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the curve
position is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
2.Repeat this procedure for each point as desired.
● Throttle curve copy
[Deleting/returning curve point]
1.Move the cursor to the curve point setting
item you want to delete/return and push the
RTN button for one second.
●Throttle curve copy function
Move the COPY item and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the copy destination condition by
scrolling the Push dial and push the RTN
button. Select the [YES] and push the RTN
button.
Normal curve adjustment
*Normal curve creates a basic curve centered around
hovering. Use it along with the normal pitch curve and
adjust so that up/down control results in a constant engine
speed.
Idle up curve adjustment
*Set a idle up curve that maintains a constant speed at all
times, even during operation which reduces the pitch
performed in flight. Create a curve matched to loop, roll,
3D, or other purposes and the idle up curve according to
the performance.
Operation precautions
Warning
When starting the engine and flying, always
set the idle up condition switch to OFF and
start the engine at idle.
174 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
Curve setting examples
The curves shown below are created by inputting
the data of the 5 points for each condition, 0%
(low side), 25%, 50% (center), 75%, 100% (high)
side. When creating a curve, enter the parameters
specified per the model (or the reference value).
●Throttle Curve (Example)
Normal Curve
Idle-up 1 Curve
Idle-up 2 Curve
Throttle Hover trim
[Throttle hover trim setting]
Setting method
● Set the function to ACT ([ON]). (initial setting)
● Select the adjustment knob.
Selection example: RD (initial setting)
● The trim operation mode (Mode: CTRM/
NORM) can be selected.
CTRM mode: Maximum rate of change
near center by center trim operation
(recommended)
NORM mode: Normal trim (horizontal
movement trim) operation.
● The trim rate can be adjusted and the
operation direction can be set.
● Trim adjustment range (Range) setting
With smaller values, the trim is only active
near the center.
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
175
Throttle limiter function
This function limits the high range of the throttle
movement by any slider or trimmer.
[Throttle limiter setting]
*Control which adjusts the limit point during flight can be set.
Setting method
•High side operating range setting
*Set at the 3rd page of the throttle curve screen.
•Activate the function.
1. Select ACT and push the RTN button.
2. Switch the display to ACT by scrolling the
Push dial.
*The display blinks.
INH: Inhibit
ACT: Activate
3. Enter the selection by pushing the RTN
button.
•ON/OFF switch setting
1. Select SW and push the RTN button.
2. The H/W SET screen is displayed. Select the
hardware and push the RTN button.
When "CTRL" is set as a "RS" side slider.
The state of full high of a throttle stick.
HIGH
Throttle
Position
Restriction
“RS”Position
Full
CENTER
LOW
Full
Slow
Restriction
In "INH", the halfway
point of "HIGH" and
"LOW".
Restriction
Slow
Full
1. Select HIGH and push the RTN button.
2. Adjust the high side operating range by
scrolling the Push dial.
*A gauge is displayed at the left side of the graph.
3. Push the RTN button to switch to the cursor
mode.
•Low side operating range setting
1. Select LOW and push the RTN button.
2. Adjust the low side operating range by
scrolling the Push dial.
*A gauge is displayed at the left side of the graph.
3. Push the RTN button to switch to the cursor
mode.
•Limiter operating range adjustment control
setting
1. Select CTRL and push the RTN button.
2. The H/W SET screen is displayed. Select the
hardware and push the RTN button.
*The throttle limiter operating position is indicated by a
dotted line on the graph.
*When limiter operating range adjustment control is NULL,
the throttle limiter function is not performed.
•Changing the control center position
1. Select CENTER and push the RTN button for 1
second. CENTER changes from INH to “rate
display”.
2. When the CENTER rate is changed, the
neutral position of the hardware set at CTRL
can be adjusted.
*When CENTER is INH, the neutral position becomes the
LOW intermediate value.
Slow
*When CENTER is changed from INH to “rate display”, the
CENTER rate is set to the LOW intermediate value.
*The CENTER rate can be set between HIGH and LOW.
176 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
THR HOLD
This function sets the throttle cut position for
auto rotation. The throttle servo operating speed
can be adjusted. (Speed)
Note: Initially, this setting does not assign the
throttle hold switch. Prior to adjusting the
parameters for the throttle hold, we suggest
designating a throttle hold switch. To do so,
access the Condition menu within the Model
menu options.
● Select [THR HOLD] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
●Servo speed
●Hold position
●Current position
●Hold position setting
Setting method
●Servo speed setting
●Hold condition switch selection
Move the cursor to the servo speed item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay)
Use the Condition select menu of the Model
menu to assign the hold condition switch.
Selection example: SG
●Hold position adjustment
Move the cursor to the hold position item
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 17%
Adjustment range: 0%~50%
*Hold position sets the throttle cut position. Adjust it so that
the carburetor is completely closed.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
Operation precautions
Warning
When starting the engine and flying, always
set the idle up condition switch to OFF and
start the engine at idle.
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
177
SWASH MIX
The swash mix function is used to correct the
swash plate in the aileron (roll) direction and
elevator (cyclic pitch) corresponding to each
operation of each condition.
This function allows the independent rate
adjustments for the ailerons, elevator and pitch.
● Select [SWASH MIX] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown
below by pushing the RTN button.
Example of use
● As an example, use swash mixing to correct
undesirable roll tendencies.
● For a condition which uses AIL to ELE, set this
function to ON.
If the front of the helicopter raises during a
right roll, when the Rate2 side is input and
the right aileron is operated, the elevator
moves to the down side. Tune by adjusting
the Rate.
For left roll, adjust to the Rate1 side.
(Currently selected condition name)
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
●Condition selection
Setting method
●Mixing rate adjustment
●Activate the mixing
Move the cursor to the mixing rate item you
want to correct and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode. Adjust the
rate independently by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100~+100%
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [ACT] item and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the mixing
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
[Switch selection]
When [ [--]] is set, the swash mixing function is
always active and operated by selecting the
condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, move
the cursor to the [SW] item and push the RTN
button to access the selection screen. Set
the switch and its ON position.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●Trim mode ON/OFF setting
When changing the trim mode, move the
cursor to the [TRIM] item and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Select ON/OFF by scrolling the Push dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to change the trim
mode ON/OFF and return to the cursor
mode.
*When mixing includes master side trim, select [ON] and
when mixing does not include master trim, select [OFF].
178 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
THROTTLE MIX
Setting example
This function corrects the slowing of engine
speed caused by swash plate operation during
aileron or elevator operation. The method of
applying clockwise or counterclockwise torque
when pirouetting can also be corrected.
● AIL to THR mixing counteracts the lag in the
engine RPM's when aileron input is given
to the helicopter. Engine over-speeding
can be adjusted independently for the
right aileron and left aileron inputs utilizing Rates1 and 2.
● Select [THROTTLE MIX] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by pushing
the RTN button.
(Currently selected condition name)
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
●To next page
RETURN
●Condition selection
Setting method
●Activate the mixing
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [ACT] item and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the mixing
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
[Switch selection]
When [ [--]] is set, the swash mixing function
is always active and operated by merely
selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, move
the cursor to the [SW] item and push the RTN
button to call the selection screen. Set the
switch and its ON position.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
rate independently by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -100~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●Operation mode setting
Move the cursor to the [MODE] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the operation mode by scrolling the
Push dial.
*The display blinks.
CTRM mode: Corrects near the center only.
LIN. mode: Corrects the complete range.
Push the RTN button to change the operation
mode and return to the cursor mode.
●Mixing rate adjustment
Move the cursor to the mixing rate item you
want to correct and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode. Adjust the
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
179
PIT to RUD mixing (Revolution mixing)
Use this mix when you want to suppress the
torque generated by main rotor pitch and speed
changes during pitch operation. Adjust so that the
nose does not move in the rudder direction.
Note: When a GY Series or other heading hold
gyro is used, since correction is performed by
the gyro, this mix is not utilized. If this function
is used when the gyro operation mode is the
AVCS mode, the neutral position will change.
● Select [PIT to RUD] at the Model menu and access
(Currently selected condition name)
the setup screen shown below by pushing the
RTN button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
Setting method
●Activate the mixing
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [ACT] item and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the mixing
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
●5-point curve setting
Move the cursor to the curve rate setting
item you want to adjust and push the RTN
button to switch to the data input mode.
Adjust the rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: P1~P5: 0%
Adjustment range: -100%~+100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the rate is
reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
Repeat this procedure for each point.
●Pitch curve copy function
Move the cursor to COPY item and push the
RTN button to switch to the data input mode.
Select the copy destination condition by
scrolling the Push dial and pushing the RTN
button. Select the [YES] and push the RTN
button.
<Normal condition mixing curve>
The mixing curve rate should be started
using smaller values.
For a rotor with a clockwise operation
direction, when pitch was input at the plus
side, set these parameters so that mixing
is in the clockwise direction. First, trim at
hovering and then adjust the neutral
position.
1. Adjustment between slow and hovering
Repeatedly hover from take off and land
at a constant rate matched to your own
rhythm. Adjust the pitch so that the nose
of the helicopter remains steady when the
throttle is raised and lowered.
2. Throttle high side (climbing and diving
from hovering)
Repeat climbing and diving from hovering
at a constant rate matched to your own
rhythm and adjust the pitch so that the
nose does not deflect when the throttle is
raised and lowered.
<Idle up condition mixing curve>
Set the mixing rate so that the rudder direction
at high-speed flight is straight ahead. Adjust for
each condition used.
180 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
GYRO mixing
This function is used to adjust gyro sensitivity.
The sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/
AVCS mode) can be set for each condition.
The gyro sensitivity can be switched with each
condition or the switch. (5 sensitivities)
*Compatible with 3 axis gyros (CGY750).
Note: When using the [Gyro2]/[Gyro3] function,
assign [Gyro2]/[Gyro3] to any channel on the
function screen.
Always set to [--] both (Control) and (Trim) for
the [Gyro] function at the Function menu in
the Linkage menu.
● Select [GYRO] at the Model menu and access the
setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
●The edit conditions can be
changed by pushing the
S1 button.
●The edit rate can be changed by operating
the edit rate button.
*When the rate switching setting of all the gyros is
“COND”, the edit rate button is not displayed.
*When the rate switching setting of
all the gyros is “Switch”, the edit
conditions are not displayed.
●When the GYRO function button is selected,
each GYRO detailed setting screen
appears.
●Setup screen selection
●Condition/Switch selection
●Gyro type selection:
[GY]/[NORM]
(Currently selected condition name)
●ON: (initial setting)
●Mode selection:
●Fine tuning VR settings [AVCS]/[NORM]
●Gyro sensitivity adjustment
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
181
Setting method
●Gyro type selection
Move the cursor to the gyro type selection
item and push the RTN button to switch to
the data input mode. Select the gyro type
by scrolling the Push dial.
[GY]: When a Futaba GY gyro is used
[NORM]: When a non-Futaba GY gyro is
used.
Push the RTN button to change the gyro type
and return to the cursor mode.
<EXAMPLE>Rudder gyro gain is changed with
a switch (SF) irrespective of condition.
Generally, gain is interlocked with condition
and changes a rate.
How to change two rates in the same
condition here.
1. Select [GYRO] at the Model menu and
access the setup screen shown below by
pushing the RTN button.
*When a Futaba GY gyro is used and [GY] type is selected,
the sensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS
and NORM modes.
●Operation mode selection (GY gyro)
Move the cursor to the operation mode
selection item and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode. Select the
operation mode by scrolling the Push dial.
[AVCS]: AVCS mode
[NORM]: Normal mode
Push the RTN button to change the operation
mode and return to the cursor mode.
●Sensitivity setting
Move the cursor to the rate item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the sensitivity by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 80%
Adjustment range: 0~100%
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the
sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
2. Move the cursor to the [COND] item and
push the RTN button to access the selection
screen. Select the [SW]. Push the RTN button
to return to the cursor mode.
3. # number shows the present switch state. In
the state of # 1 a cursor is moved to [--] and
RTN is pushed.
4. [SF] is chosen by [H/W SELECT] and then a
top is turned ON.
●Fine tuning VR settings
Move the cursor to the [--] item and push the
RTN button to access the selection screen.
Select the control.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
5. [TYPE GY] and [RATE] of a state of "#1=SF
top" are set up.
SF : Top = #1
Move the cursor to the rate item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the trim rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0%
Adjustment range: -20~+20%
● The
number
of a SW state
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the
sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
6. It is a setup of "#2". Move the cursor to
the [#1] item and push the RTN button to
access the selection screen. Select the [#2].
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
182 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
7. Move the cursor to the [--] item and push
the RTN button.
8. [SF] is chosen by [H/W SELECT] and then a
bottom is turned ON. the RTN button.
9. [TYPE GY] and [RATE] of a state of "#2=SF
bottom" are set up.
SF : Bottom = #2
● The
number
of a SW state
*If three position switch is chosen, the change of three rates
can be performed.
*Combined use of two or more switches cannot be performed.
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
183
GOVERNOR mixing
When using a Futaba GV-1/GY701/CGY750
governor, this function is used to switch the RPM
of the helicopter's rotor head. The rotor head speed
can be switched with each condition or the switch.
*The governor is used by connecting the governor speed
setting channel to CH7 (initial setting).
*When using an independent governor [ON]/[OFF] switch,
connect the AUX([ON]/[OFF]) connector of the governor to
CH8 and set the switch to CH8 (Governor2) at the Function
menu of the Linkage Menu.
Note: Always set (Control) and (Trim) to [--]
for [Governor] of the Function menu of the
Linkage menu.
● Select [GOVERNOR] at the Model menu and access
the setup screen shown below by pushing the RTN
button.
●Setup screen selection
●Condition/Switch selection
(Currently selected condition name)
●ACT/INH: INH (initial setting)
<Push Dial>
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●Select the function name
and return to the Model
menu by pushing the RTN
button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
●Unit display selection:
[%]/[rpm]
●Fine tuning VR settings
●RPM adjustment
Setting method
●Activate the mixing
When using this function, move the cursor to
the [INH] item and push the RTN button to
switch to the data input mode.
Select the ACT mode by scrolling the Push
dial.
*The display blinks.
Push the RTN button to activate the mixing
and return to the cursor mode. (ON is
displayed.)
When the Governor is changed from the
default inhibited (INH) state to the active
(ACT) state, the endpoint menu will be
displayed and it is possible to utilize the
endpoints for this given condition.
Use the Push Dial to scroll to either YES
(incorporate the default endpoints) or NO
(endpoints are not utilized. Push the Return
(RTN) button to confirm the selection made.
●RPM adjustment
Move the cursor to the rate item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the rpm by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 50% (1500rpm)
Adjustment range: OFF, 0~110% (OFF,
700~3500rpm)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the
sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
*When the function is set ON/OFF at the governor setup
screen, the governor rpm setting channel end point servo
travel and limit point are now initialized.
*When changed from INH to ACT (ON), the servo travel is
initialized to 100 and the limit point is initialized to 155.
*When operation is changed to INH at all conditions, the
servo travel is initialized to 100 and the limit point is
initialized to 135.
●Unit diplay selection
Move the cursor to the UNIT item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Select the unit by scrolling the Push
dial.
Push the RTN button to change the operation
mode and return to the cursor mode.
184 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
●Diplay mode selection
*When [rpm] mode is selected above setting, the display
mode can be selected.
*There is no change in the transmitter output even when the
"MODE" is changed. Calibration should be performed via
the governor.
*In order to use the Governor function of the T12K, it is
necessary to change the settings on the governor for the low
side 700rpm mode.
When the MODE of the Governor screen's
model menu is changed, the change is also
indicated on-screen.
The chart below indicates the mode percentage and
the corresponding RPM.
MODE
1000-2000rpm
1000-2500rpm
1000-3500rpm
700-2000rpm
700-2500rpm
700-3500rpm
0%
1000rpm
1000rpm
1000rpm
700rpm
700rpm
700rpm
50%
1500rpm
1500rpm
1500rpm
1500rpm
1500rpm
1500rpm
100% 110%
2000rpm
2500rpm
3500rpm
2000rpm
2500rpm
3500rpm
2100rpm
2700rpm
3900rpm
2100rpm
2700rpm
3900rpm
<EXAMPLE>RPM rate is changed with a
switch (SF) irrespective of condition.
Generally, RPM rate is interlocked with a
condition and changes a rate.
How to change two rates in the same
condition.
1. Select [GOVERNOR] at the Model menu
and access the setup screen shown below
by pushing the RTN button.
2. Move the cursor to the [COND] item and
push the RTN button to access the selection
screen. Select the [SW]. Push the RTN button
to return to the cursor mode. And [INH] is
set to [ACT].
3. # number shows the present switch state.
In the state of # 1, a cursor is moved to [--]
and RTN is pushed.
●Fine tuning VR settings
Move the cursor to the [--] item and push the
RTN button to access the selection screen.
Select the control.
*For a description of the switch selection method, see the
description at the back of this manual.
Move the cursor to the rate item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode.
Adjust the trim rate by scrolling the Push dial.
Initial value: 0% (0rpm)
Adjustment range: -20~+20% (-200~+200rpm)
*When the RTN button is pushed for one second, the
sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode.
4. [SF] is chosen by [H/W SELECT] and then a
top is turned ON.
5. [MODE] and [RATE] of a state of "#1=SF
top"are set up.
SF : Top = #1 ● The number
of a SW state
6. It is a setup of "#2". Move the cursor to
the [#1] item and push the RTN button to
access the selection screen. Select the [#2].
Push the RTN button to return to the cursor
mode. And [INH] is set to [ACT].
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
185
●CAL (Calibration)
This function transmits a reference signal from
the transmitter for setting the governor's side
speed display. The governor and transmitter
set values (speed display) can be matched.
*The CAL button can only be displayed in rpm mode.
7. Move the cursor to the [--] item and push
the RTN button.
8. [SF] is chosen by [H/W SELECT] and then a
bottom is turned ON by pushing the RTN
button.
9. [MODE] and [RATE] of a state of "#2=SF
bottom"are set up.
SF : Bottom = #2
● The
number
of a SW state
*If the 3 position switch is chosen, 3 rate changes can be
performed.
*Combined use of two or more switches cannot be performed.
In "ON", "CAL" appears
Button added to the reference signal output screen.
(Displayed only in the rpm mode.)
1. Move the cursor to the CAL button and
push the RTN button.
2. The display switches to the screen that
transmits the reference signal.
3. Move the cursor to OFF and push the RTN
button.
4. Once it scrolls to the mode of your choice,
push the RTN button.
5. Set the transmitter's displayed speed. Adjust
the governor's speed display on its side.
(Refer to your governor's instruction manual
on how to make proper adjustments).
186 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>
TIMER ST1/ST2
Timer setting
The Timer function may be set for any desired
time, i.e. engine run time, specified times for
competitions, etc. Two independent timers are
provided for your use. The timers are stored
independently with each model, meaning that
when you switch between model setups, the timer
associated with the new model is brought up
automatically.
The timers may be set to start and stop from
the motion of any switch or stick. You may set the
ON and OFF directions freely. Each timer has a
capacity of up to 59 minutes 59, seconds.
Each timer may be set for countdown (DOWN
mode) or count-up (UP mode) operation with a
target time of up to 99 hours 59 minutes (HOUR
mode).
If a target time is set and the timer reaches the set
time, a buzzer sound for each count is generated.
Countdown timers sound one short beep during
the last twenty seconds and two short beeps during
the last ten seconds before reaching the target,
then a long tone at the target time, and continue
counting while displaying a minus (-) sign. Countup timers also beep the last twenty and ten seconds,
beep the target time, and keep counting upwards
until shutdown.
A mode which sounds an alarm each minute of
the time remaining up to the timer alarm time can
be selected.
The HOUR mode is convenient for engine
maintenance and other long-term measurements.
*W hen the HOUR mode is set, "xx (hour): xx (minute)"
is displayed on the count time display. Seconds are not
displayed.
*When the HOUR mode is set, ":" blinks each second during
timer operation.
*W hen the HOUR mode is set, the alarm function is
inhibited.
● Select ST1 or ST2 at the home screen and
call the setup screen shown below by
pushing the RTN button.
<Push Dial>
●Select the function name
and return to the home
screen by pushing the
RTN button or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button.
Scrolling
●Moving cursor
●Selecting mode
●Adjusting value
●To input data mode
●Data is entered
RETURN
"Vibes" type
If the following types are selected, the
transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 4
<Appendix>
187
Timer setting
Timer operation
●Up timer/down timer setting
● Timer ST1 and ST2 are started/stopped by a
pre-selected start/stop switch.
● To reset a timer, operate the pre-selected
reset switch, or move the cursor to the [RESET]
display on the timer screen and push the RTN
button.
Move the cursor to the [MODE] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the mode by scrolling the Push dial
and push the RTN button.
[UP]: Up timer
[DOWN]: Down timer
[HOUR]: Hour mode timer
●Timer time setting
Move the cursor to the [ALARM] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Set the time by scrolling the Push dial.
[00]:[00]:[min]:[sec]
Push the RTN button to end the adjustment
and return to the cursor mode.
●Switch setting
Move the cursor to the item of the switch you
want to set, access the switch setup screen
by pushing the RTN button. Select the switch
and ON direction.
[For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch
Setting Method] located on the next page.]
[START]: Start switch
[STOP]: Stop switch
[RESET]: Reset switch
Speech function
Speech function is added
t o T I M E R ( S T 1 a n d S T 2 ) .
When the Up or Down timers are
activated, speech output is available.
It is phone output only.
■↑ mode
The voice outputs each minute of the time elapsed from
timer start.
Ex. one minute,・・・ two minutes,・・・
It outputs voice 20 seconds before reaching to
the target time.
Ex. twenty seconds
It is counted down by voice from 10 seconds
before reaching to the target time.
Ex. ten, nine, eight・・・ three, two, one
■↓ mode
The voice outputs each minute of the time remaining up
to the alarm time.
Ex.・・・ ten minutes,・・・ nine minutes,・・・
It outputs voice every 10 seconds from 50 seconds
before reaching to the target time.
Ex. fifty seconds,・・・ forty seconds,・・・
It is counted down by voice from 10 seconds
before reaching to the target time.
Ex. ten, nine, eight・・・ three, two, one
*The voice alarm of timer is delayed from the actual time.
●Memory setting
*During logging telemetry data, the voice alarm is delayed.
Move the cursor to the [MEMORY] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
Select the mode by scrolling the Push dial
and push the RTN button.
[OFF]: Memory function OFF
[ON]: Mode where the timer is not reset when
turned power off and switched the model.
*Usually, the priority of the speech of ST1 is higher than ST2.
However, if the timer's 10-second countdown has already
begun, it is given the priority.
●A mode which sounds an alarm each minute
can be selected.
Change the setting using the "" button (or
"" button).
"": Alarm sounds each minute of the time
elapsed from timer start. (Conventional
mode)
"": Alarm sounds each minute of the time
remaining up to the alarm time.
188 <Appendix>
*The priority of the timer speech is higher than the telemetry
speech. Telemetry speech is stopped and the timer speech is
outputted, even if telemetry speech is outputted.
*The telemetry speech cannot be outputted during the
10-second countdown.
TH% Timer
TH% Timer is the function which changes progress of
a timer according to the location of the throttle stick.
When the throttle stick is raised for faster speed, the
speed of the timer usually increases. With the throttle
stick at mid-range speed, the timer speed decreases (to
50%). When the throttle is positioned at low end, the
timer's progress stops. It's possible to set the timer to
match your fuselage's fuel consumption.
Buzzer
●Timers sound two short beeps during the last
10% before reaching the target.
●If a target time is set and the timer reaches
the set time, a 1-second buzzer sounds.
Vibrator
●Vibrator is activated the last 10% before
reaching the target.
●If a target time is set and the timer reaches
the set time, vibrator is activated.
"TH%":
Start is 0%
"--":Normal Timer
"TH%":TH% Timer
Up Timer Screen
"TH%":
Start is 100%
"--":Normal Timer
"TH%":TH% Timer
*The consumption of the battery/fuel is different
depending on the conditions, so use an TH% Timer
as reference.
*The TH% time is different from the actual elapsed
time.
Down timer screen
If either Timer 1 or Timer 2 is set to TH%
mode, the model type icon is not
displayed and the% value of the timer is
displayed.
If either Timer 1 or Timer
2 is set to TH% mode,
the model type icon
will not be displayed
and the display
position of the card
icon and key lock icon
will change.
TH% Home Screen
When set to TH% mode, timer value is
standard size and % value is displayed
in large size.
TH% Timer Screen
High
Middle
When a throttle stick is the
high side, the speed of the
timer usually increases.
When a throttle stick is
middle-speed, the timer
speed decreases (by 50%).
When a throttle stick is low,
timer progress stops.
Low
<Appendix>
189
Switch Setting Method
The various functions used in the T12K can
be activated by a switch. For the purposes of this
manual, a stick position, VR position, etc. shall
be commonly referred to as a switch in all cases.
Whenever the manual indicates that something is
operated via a switch, it is possible for the user to
activate this setting via a stick, stick position, etc.
Switch selection
When a switch is selected at a mixing function, etc., the selection screen shown below appears.
(Switch selection screen example)
Switch selection
When stick, trim lever, or knob selected
1.Use the Push dial to move the cursor
(highlights) to the switch you want to
select and push the RTN button.
When a stick, trim lever, or knob is used as a
switch, two operation modes can be selected:
*The switch blinks.
2.To return to the preceeding screen, move
the cursor to the [H/W SELECT] at the top
of the screen and push the RTN button.
Or, move the cursor to the [ON/OFF] and
call the ON/OFF position setting screen by
pushing the RTN button.
When the switch is selected
Once the switch is selected, the ON/OFF
setting is also activated.
1. When you want to change the mode,
move the cursor to [MODE] item and push
the RTN button to switch to the data input
mode. Switch the display to the mode you
want to change by scrolling the Push dial
and then make the change by pushing
the RTN button.
●Mode: [LIN]/[SYM]
*Set the ON/Off point by the method described on the next page.
Alternate mode setting
*The ON/OFF setting state of each position is displayed.
1. When you want to change the ON/OFF
setting, use the Push dial to move the
cursor and push the RTN button to switch
to the data input mode. Switch the ON/
Off display by scrolling the Push dial.
*ON/OFF display blinks.
2. When the RTN button is pushed, the ON/
OFF setting is changed. (Push the S1
button to stop the change.)
3.To return to the preceeding screen, move
the cursor to the [ON/OFF] at the top of
the screen and push the RTN button.
190 <Appendix>
●ALTERNATE mode: [OFF]/[ON]
1.Move the cursor to the [ALTERNATE] item
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
2.Change to the mode you want to set by
scrolling the Push dial.
*The mode display blinks.
3.Push the RTN button. (Push the S1 button to
stop the change.)
4.To return to the preceeding screen, move
the cursor to the [ON/OFF] at the top of the
screen and push the RTN button.
Operation modes
The operation modes available when a stick, trim
lever, or knob is selected are described below.
Shifting the ON/Off point
The ON/OFF point can be shifted. ON/OFF at
a free position can be changed.
Linear mode [LIN]
●Black range: OFF range
●White range: ON range
This mode sets ON/OFF to the left or right (up
or down) with the set point as the reference.
Symmetrical mode [SYM]
[Setting method]
1. First, use the Push dial to move the cursor to the [POS] item.
2. Move the stick, trim lever, or knob to the
point you want to change and push the
RTN button. The point is shifted.
3.To return to the preceeding screen, move
the cursor to the [ON/OFF] at the top of
the screen and push the RTN button.
Left and right (up and down) operations are
symmetrical near the neutral position. For instance,
when you want to switch D/R with the aileron
stick, when the stick is moved to the left or right,
D/R can be turned on at the same position.
<Appendix>
191
Logic switch (Condition Select function only)
The logic switch function lets you turn operation on or off by combining two switches.
Logic mode
AND: When both switches are ON, the
condition is ON.
OR: When either switch is ON, the condition
is ON.
EX-OR: When the two switches are in
different states, the condition is ON.
Switch mode selection
1.Move the cursor to the [SINGLE] item and
push the RTN button to switch to the data
input mode.
2.Select the [LOGIC] by scrolling the Push
dial.
*[LOGIC] display blinks.
3.Push the RTN button to change to the logic
switch mode.
(Logic switch setting screen)
Logic mode selection
1.Move the cursor to the logic mode item
and push the RTN button to switch to the
data input mode.
2.Select the logic mode by scrolling the Push
dial. [AND, OR or EX-OR]
*The mode display blinks.
3.Push the RTN button to change to the logic
mode.
Swich selection
1.Select the right or left switch respectively.
(Refer to the description at the previous
page.)
To return to the preceeding screen, move
the cursor to the [SWITCH] at the top of the
screen and push the RTN button.
FUTABA CORPORATION
oak kandakajicho 8F 3-4 Kandakajicho, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 101-0045, Japan
TEL: +81-3-4316-4820, FAX: +81-3-4316-4823
©FUTABA CORPORATION
192 <Appendix>
2017, 12
(1)
Download PDF